Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Students can Download Chapter 7 Web Hosting Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Plus Two Computer Application Web Hosting One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The companies that provide web hosting services are called_____.
Answer:
Web Hosts

Question 2.
The service of providing storage space in a web server to make a website available on Internet is called______.
Answer:
web hosting

Question 3.
Which of the following is true in the case of dedicated hosting?
(a) It shares server with other websites.
(b) It is usually inexpensive.
(c) It does not guarantee performance.
(d) It offers freedom for the clients to choose the hardware and the software.
Answer:
(d) It offers freedom for the clients to choose the hardware and the software.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Choose the odd one out, and justify your answer,
(a) Shared hosting
(b) Dedicated hosting
(c) DNS
(d) Virtual Private Server
Answer:
(c) DNS others are types of web hosting.

Question 5.
______is the service of providing storage space in a Webserver.

OR

Storing the web pages of a website in a server is popularly known as_____.
Answer:
Web hosting

Question 6.
The companies that provides web hosting services are called______.
Answer:
Web hosts

Question 7.
Odd one out.
(a) Shared
(b) Dedicated
(c) VPS
(d) DNS
Answer:
(d) DNS, means Domain Name System. The others are types of web hosting.

Question 8.
VPS stands for______.
Answer:
Virtual Private Server

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 9.
From the following select the most commonly used web hosting.
(a) Shared
(b) Dedicated
(c) VPS
(d) DNS
Answer:
(a) Shared hosting

Question 10.
DNS stands for_____.
Answer:
Domain Name System

Question 11.
‘A record’ means_____.
Answer:
Address record

Question 12.
FTP stands for______.
Answer:
File Transfer Protocol

Question 13.
Odd one out.
(a) Mozilla Firefox
(b) FileZilla
(c) CuteFTP
(d) SmartFTP
Answer:
(a) Mozilla Firefox, it is a web browser, the others are popular FTP client software.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 14.
______hosting provides web hosting services free of change.
Answer:
Free hosting

Question 15.
Give an example for Free web hosting services with sub domain website address.
Answer:
www.bvmhsskaiparamba.facebook.com

Question 16.
Give an example for Free web hosting services with directory service website address.
Answer:
www.facebook.com/bvm hss kalparamba

Question 17.
CMS stands for______.
Answer:
Content Management System

Question 18.
The term ‘responsive web designing’ was introduced by______.
Answer:
Ethan Marcotte.

Question 19.
The method of Flexible designing of web pages to suit the various types of screens is called______.
Answer:
Responsive web design method

Question 20.
In dedicated hosting, if the client is allowed to place his own purchased web server in the service
provider’s facility, then it is called______.
Answer:
Co-location

Question 21.
What are the information contain in a ICANN database?
Answer:
Registered domain names/name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the registrants.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 22.
What is ‘A record’?
Answer:
‘A record’ is used to store the IP address and the corresponding domain name.

Question 23.
Joomla is an example for______.
(a) CMS
(b) ISP
(c) DNS
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) CMS

Question 24.
The responsive web design feature that converts horizontal menu to a dropdown menu in mobile phones is called______.
Answer:
Media queries.

Question 25.
The organization that maintains the WHOIS data-base of domain names is______.
Answer:
ICANN

Plus Two Computer Application Web Hosting Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider that your school is planning to host a website. What are the factors that you will consider while choosing the type of web hosting?
Answer:
Following factors to be considered

  1. Buying sufficient amount of memory space for storing our website files
  2. If the web pages contain programming contents supporting technology must be consider
  3. Based upon the programs select Windows hosting or Linux hosting.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 2.
Emmanuel wishes to buy a suitable domain for his company. Unfortunately, the domain name he chose is already registered by someone else. Name the feature that will help him to find the current owner. List the details will he get.
Answer:
WHOIS. Name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the registrant.

Question 3.
What is the use of FTP client software? Give an example.
Answer:
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) client software. When a client requests a website by entering website address. Then FTP client software helps to establish a connection between client computer and remote server computer.

Unauthorised access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files for that SSH(Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used. Instead of http://, it uses ftp://.

By using FTP client s/w we’ can transfer(upload) the files from our computer to the web server by using the ‘drag and drop’ method. The popular FTP client software are FileZilla, Cute FTP, Smart FTP, etc.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Haseena has decided to host her new website using free hosting facility; her friend Rinisha is against this move. Can you guess her argument against the utilization of free hosting facility?
Answer:
In free web hosting service, the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facility such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia (audio and viedo) files.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Hosting Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Priya has developed a website for her shop. She has purchased a domain name and hosting space.

  1. Name the software that will help her to transfer her files from her computer to the web server.
  2. List the requirements in that software that are necessary to connect to the web server.

Answer:

  1. FTP software such as FileZilla, Cute FTP, Smart FTP
  2. Following are the requirements to connect to the web server
    • Domain name/IP address
    • Username
    • Password

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 2.
Explain the advantages of using SFTP protocol in FTP client software.
Answer:
Un authorised access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files, for this SSH (Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used. It encrypts and sends usernames, passwords, and data to the web server.

Question 3.
Merin plans to create a website for their family without spending money.

  1. List some of the limitations that Merin will face regarding the hosting space for website.
  2. How will she provide a domain name for the website?

Answer:
1. In free web hosting service, the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facility such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia (audio and viedo) files.

2. Usually two types of free web hosting services as follows.

  • as a directory service: service provider’s website address/our website address
    eg: www.facebook.com/bvmhsskalparamba
  • as a sub domain: Our website address.service providers website address
    eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com

Question 4.
Recentlly more and more people are using Content Management Systems (CMS) for developing professional websites. What can be the reasons for this?
Answer:
CMS means Content Management System. Do you heard about Data Base Management System (DBMS). DBMS is a software (collection of programs) used to create, alter modify, delete and retrieve records of a Data Base.

Similarly CMS is a collection of programs that is used to create, modify, update and publish website contents. CMS can be downloaded freely and is useful to design and manage attractive and interactive websites with the help of templates that are available in CMS. WordPress, Joomla, etc. are the examples of CMS.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 5.
Suggest a hosting type for the following websites given below. Justify.

  1. Website for a medical shop in your city.
  2. Website for Public Service Commission (PSC) of Kerala.
  3. Website for an online shopping facility.

Answer:

  1. Shared hosting
  2. Dedicated/VPS
  3. Dedicated/VPS

Question 6.
Consider that a college in your locality plans to shift its website from shared type of hosting to VPS hosting. List the advantages that the website will gain from this change.
Answer:
Virtual Private Server (VPS):
A VPS is a virtual machine sold as a service by an Internet hosting Service. A VPS runs its own copy of an OS(Operating System) and customers have super level access to that OS instance, so they can install almost any s/w that runs on that OS.

This type is suitable for websites that require more features than shared hosting but less features than dedicated hosting.
Eg: It is similar to owning a Condo

Question 7.
Mr. Mohan wants to host a personal website with minimal cost. Which type of web hosting would you advise for him? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Shared Hosting:
This type of hosting sharing resources, like memory, disk space, and CPU hence the name shared. Several websites share the same server. This is suitable for small websites that have less traffic and it is not suitable for large websites that have large bandwidth, large storage space and have large volume of traffic.

Eg: Shared hosting is very similar to living in an Apartment(Villas) complex. All residents are in the same location and must share the available resources(Car parking area, Swimming pool, Gymnasium, playground, etc) with every one.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 8.
A super market in a city wishes to take its business online. It plans to accept orders for its products through a website and receive payments online.

  1. Which type of hosting is suitable for this website?
  2. Explain the reason for your choice,

Answer:
1. Dedicated Hosting.

2. A web server and its resources are exclusively for one website that have large volume of traffic means large volume of requests by the visitors.

Some Govt, departments or large organizations require uninterrupted services for that round the clock power supply is needed. It is too expensive but it is more reliable and provide good service to the public.

Eg: It is similar to living in an Our own house. All the resources in your house is only for you. No one else’s account resides on the computer and would not be capable of tapping into your resourses.

Question 9.
Emil wishes to purchase the web hosting space required to host a website for his medical shop. List the features to be taken into consideration while buying hosting space on a web server.
Answer:
Following factors to be considered

  1. Buying sufficient amount of memory space for storing our website files
  2. If the web pages contain programming contents supporting technology must be consider
  3. Based upon the programs select Windows hosting or Linux hosting.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 10.
How can we connect a website hosted in a Webserver to a domain name?
Answer:
Millions of websites are available over Internet so that our website must be registered with a suitable name. Domain Name registration is used to identify a website over Internet.

A domain name must be unique(i.e. no two website with same name is available). So you have to check the availability of domain name before you register it, for this www.whois.net website will help.

If the domain name entered is available then we can register it by paying the Annual registration fees through online. Consider a Post Office, it has two addresses one string address (Irinjalakuda) and one numeric(pin) code (680121).

Just like this, the website has also two addresses a string address for example www.agker.cag.gov in and a numeric address (http:/ /210.212.239.70/). We are following string address, hence this domain name has to be connected to the corresponding IP address of the web server.

This is done by using ‘A record’(Address record) of the domain. ‘A record’ is used to store the IP address and the corresponding domain name.

Question 11.
What is the advantage of using SFTP protocol in FTP software?
Answer:
FTP(File Transfer Protocol) client software. When a client requests a website by entering website address. Then FTP client software helps to establish a connection between client computer and remote server computer.

Unauthorised access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files for that SSH(Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used. Instead of http://, it uses ftp://.

By using FTP client s/w we can transfer(upload) the files from our computer to the web server by using the ‘drag and drop’ method. The popular FTP client software are FileZilla, CuteFTP, SmartFTP, etc.

Question 12.
Raju wishes to host a website for his family. What are the advantages that free web hosting companies provide?
Answer:
The name implies it is free of cost service and the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facility such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia(audio and video) files.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

A paid service website’s address is as follows
eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.com
Usually two types of free web hosting services as follows

  1. as a directory service: Service provider’s website address/our website address
    eg: www.facebook.com / bvm hss kalparambu
  2. as a Sub domain: Our website address.service providers website address
    eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com

Earlier web hosting services are expensive but nowadays it is cheaper hence reduced the need for free web hosting.

Question 13.
What is CMS? What are the features of CMS? Give Examples.
Answer:
CMS means Content Management System. Do you heard about Data Base Management System (DBMS). DBMS is a software(collection of programs) used to create, alter, modify, delete and retrieve records of a Data Base.

Similarly, CMS is a collection of programs that is used to create, modify, update and publish website contents. CMS can be downloaded freely and is useful to design and manage attractive and interactive websites with the help of templates that are available in CMS. WordPress, Joomla, etc. are the examples of CMS.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Hosting Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain different types of web hosting?
Answer:
Types of web hosting:
Various types of web hosting services are available. We can choose the web hosting services according to our needs depends upon the storage space needed for hosting, the number of visitors expected to visit, etc.

1. Shared Hosting:
This type of hosting sharing resources, like memory, disk space, and CPU hence the name shared. Several websites share the same server.

This is suitable for small websites that have less traffic and it is not suitable for large websites that have large bandwidth, large storage space and have large volume of traffic.

Eg: Shared hosting is very similar to living in an Apartment(Villas) complex. All residents are in the same location and must share the available resources(Car parking area, Swimming pool, Gymnasium, play ground, etc) with every one.

2. Dedicated Hosting:
A web server and its resources are exclusively for one website that have large volume of traffic means large volume of requests by the visitors.

Some Govt, departments or large organizations require uninterrupted services for that round the clock power supply is needed. It is too expensive but it is more reliable and provide good service to the public.

Eg: It is similar to living in an Our own house. All the resources in your house is only for you. No one else’s account resides on the computer and would not be capable of tapping into your resourses.

3. Virtual Private Server (VPS):
A VPS is a virtual machine sold as a service by an Internet hosting Service. A VPS runs its own copy of an OS (Operating System) and customers have super level access to that OS instance, so they can install almost any s/w that runs on that OS.

This type is suitable for websites that require more features than shared hosting but less features than dedicated hosting.
Eg: It is similar to owning a Condo.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 2.

  1. What is responsive web design? (3)
  2. Why is it gaining importance recently? (2)

Answer:
1. The home page is displayed differently according to the screen size of the browser window(different screen sized devices mobile phone, palmtop, tablet, laptop, and desktop) we used.

The website is designed dynamically (flexibly) that suit the screen size of different device introduced by Ethan Marcotte. Before this, companies have to design different websites for different screen sized devices.

By responsive web design, companies have to design only one website that suitably displayed according to the screen size of the devices. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries.

Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.

Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the
device.

Media queries: There is an option(settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

2. Insted of using desktops or laptops many people nowadays visit websites using tablets and mobiles phones. Portability is the main reason for this.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 3.
Today, we visit websites using tablets and mobile phones also. You might have noticed that the same website is displayed in a different layout in different devices.

  1. Name the concept used for this. (1)
  2. List and explain the technologies used for implementing this concept. (5)

Answer:

  1. Responsive web design.
  2. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries.

Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.

Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.

Media queries: There is an option(settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.

  1. What is responsive web design? (3)
  2. How is responsive web design implemented? (2)

Answer:
1. The home page is displayed differently according to the screen size of the browser window(different screen sized devices mobile phone, palmtop, tablet, laptop, and desktop) we used.

The website is designed dynamically(flexibly) that suit the screen size of different device introduced by Ethan Marcotte. Before this, companies have to design different websites for different screen sized devices.

By responsive web design, companies have to design only one website that suitably displayed according to the screen size of the devices.

2. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries

Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.
Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.

Media queries: There is an option(settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Students can Download Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Meiosis results in
(a) Production of gametes
(b) Reduction in the number of chromosomes
(c) Introduction of variation
(d) all of the above
Answer:
(d) all of the above

Question 2.
At which stage of meiosis does the genetic constitution of gametes is finally decided
(a) Metaphase I
(b) Anaphase II
(c) Metaphase II
(d) Anaphase I
Answer:
(d) Anaphase I

Question 3.
Meiosis occurs in organisms during
(a) Sexual reproduction
(b) Vegetative reproduction
(c) Both sexual and vegetative reproduction
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Sexual reproduction

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 4.
During anaphase-l of meiosis
(a) Homologous chromosomes separate
(b) Non-homologous autosomes separate
(c) Sister chromatids separate
(d) non-sister chromatids separate
Answer:
(a) Homologous chromosomes separate

Question 5.
Mitosis is characterised by
(a) Reduction division
(b) Equal division
(c) Both reduction and equal division
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Equal division

Question 6.
A bivalent of meiosis-l consists of
(a) Two chromatids and one centromere
(b) Two chromatids and two centromere
(c) Four chromatids and two centromere
(d) Four chromatids and four centromere
Answer:
(c) Four chromatids and two centromere

Question 7.
Cells which are not dividing are likely to be at
(a) G1
(b) G2
(c) Go
(d) S phase
Answer:
(c) Go

Question 8.
Which type cell divisions occur in meristematic cell of root apex?
Answer:
Mitosis

Question 9.
In which stage the actual reduction of chromosome number occurs in meiosis.
Answer:
Anaphase 1

Question 10.
Give the term for the failure of separation of homologous chromosomes.
Answer:
Non-disjunction

Question 11.
Name the cell divisions which help in growth and recombination of genes.
Answer:
Mitosis and meiosis

Question 12.
It is observed that heart cells do not exhibit cell division. Such cells do not divide further and exit ____ phase to enter an inactive stage called ____ of cell cycle. Fill in the blanks.
Answer:
G1 and G0

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 13.
In the case of plant cells, the formation of new cell wall begins with a simple precursor. What is this precursor?
Answer:
Middle lamella

Question 14.
It is said that the one cycle of cell division in human cells (eukaryotic cells) takes 24 hours. Which phase of the cycle, do you think occupies the maximum part of cell cycle?
Answer:
Interphase.

Question 15.
At what stage of cell cycle does DNA synthesis take place?
Answer:
substage of Interphase

Question 16.
If the failure of division of cytoplasm occurs after nuclear division, What will happen to the cell?
Answer:
Free nucleii are formed

Question 17.
An anther has 1200 pollen grains. How many pollen mother cells must have been there to produce them?
Answer:
300 pollen mother cells

Question 18.
What is the peculiarity of zygotene?
Answer:
The pairing of the homologous chromosome called synapsis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 19.
It is the inactive stage of cell division but cell differentiation occurs. Name it.
Answer:
G0 Phase /Quiscent stage.

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Meiosis is the type of cell division which maintain the race. Discuss.
Answer:
Reduces the chromosome number to half, so that chromosome number is maintained in the next generation.

Question 2.
Interphase in cell cycle is sometimes referred to as resting phase. Do you consider this statement true? Substantiate your answer.
Answer:
No.

  1. Nucleus and cytoplasm are metabolically very active.
  2. Amount of DNA becomes doubled.

Question 3.
A diagram of typical cell cycle of a higher plant is shown here. Identify each stage of the cycle and explain what happens during these stages.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division img1
Answer:

  • G1 – pre mitotic gap -synthesis of RNA &Proteins
  • S – phase of synthesis – DNA replication
  • G2 – Post mitotic Gap phase synthesis of RNA &Proteins continues
  • M – Mitotic phase
  • G0 – Inactive phase

Question 4.
Cytokinesis differs in plant and animal cell. Substantiate this statement.
Answer:

  • Plant cell – formation of cell plate.
  • Animal cell – Invagination of cell membrane.

Question 5.
Analyse the column A and B arrange the matter is an appropriate order.

AB
1)  Pachytene

2)  S phase

3) Dyad

4) M phase

a) Interphase

b) Telophase I

c)  Mitotic phase

d) Prophase I

Answer:

AB
1)  Pachytene

2)  S phase

3)  Dyad

4)  M phase

Prophase I

Interphase

Telophase I

Mitotic phase

Question 6.
Identify the stages of Mitosis in which the following events take place:

  1. Synapsis
  2. Terminalisation of chiasmata.

Answer:

  1. Zygotene
  2. Diakinesis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 7.
Different stages of Prophase I of Meiosis are given in column A, arrange them in correct order and match them with the events in column B.

AB
i) Diplotenea) Chromosomes become gradually visible under the light microscope
ii) Pachyteneb) The pairing of Homologous chromosomes
iii) Leptotenec) The appearance of recombination nodules and crossing over takes place
iv) Zygotened) Dissolution of synaptonemal complex and separation of bivalents.
e) Terminalisation of Chiasmata

Answer:

  1. (i) – d
  2. (ii) – c
  3. (iii) – a
  4. (iv) – b

Question 8.
The pairing of homologous chromosomes is called synapsis.

  1. Name each pair of homologous chromosomes.
  2. Name the stage of prophase at which it takes place.

Answer:

  1. Bivalent
  2. Zygotene

Question 9.
Specific chromosome number of each species is conserved across generations in sexually reproducing organisms. What is the reason for this? Write the different steps of this process.
Answer:

  1. Meiosis (meiosis I & II)
  2. Prophase Meta phase Ana phase Telophase

Question 10.
The life cycle of a cell is called cell cycle. It consists of four stages such as Gv S, G2, and M.

  1. Construct a pie diagram showing the different stages indicated above.
  2. State the major events occurring in G, S, and G2 phases.

Answer:
1. Pie diagram of cell cycle.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division img2
2. G1 Phase -1, Cell grows in size and prepares the machinery needed for the DNA replication. RNA and proteins are synthesized. S phase – DNA replication. G2 phase – Synthesis of RNA and proteins.

Question 11.
Arrange the following stages of cell cycle in correct sequence S, G2, G1, M.
Answer:
S, M, G1, S, G2

Question 12.
X’ shaped structure called ‘chiasmata occurs during a particular stage of cell division.

  1. Name the stage?
  2. What is the significance of this type of cell division?

Answer:

  1. Pachytene
  2. The exchange of genes takes place between homologous chromosomes.

Question 13.
Given below are the five phases of prophase I of Meiosis I. Arrange them in correct order.
Zygotene, diakinesis, diplotene, leptotene, pachytene
Answer:
Leptotene, Zygotene, Pachytene, diplotene and diakinesis

Question 14.
Give the scientific term of the following.

  1. Interchange of genetic material between non-sister chromatids of the homologues chromosomes
  2. The plane of alignment of the chromosomes at metaphase

Answer:

  1. Crossing over
  2. Equatorial

Question 15.
Identify the diagram and label a, b,c and write the events during this.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division img3
Answer:
(a)G1
(b) S
(c)G2

  • G1 – Interval between mitosis and initiation of DNA replication.
  • S – DNA synthesis or replication of DNA occurs.
  • G2 – In this phase proteins are synthesised for mitosis.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 16.
You have supplied I set of glass slides showing gametogenesis or garnets formation in an animal In one of the slide you observed the following features. Four cells with haploid number of chromosomes. Your friend told you that this is a meiotic division. (Hint: The diploid number of chromosome is 16.)
Are you agree with this statement. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Yes. Meiosis takes place in diploid cell or meiocyte to form four haploid cells. These cells contain 8 chromosomes each.

Question 17.
Differentiate reduction division from equational division.
Answer:
1. Reduction division:
It occurs in diploid cells to form 4 haploid cells, ie, the Chromosome number reduced to half in Meiosis I and results 2 daughter cells, which again divides to form 4 daughter cells. All cells formed in meiosis are haploid.

2. Equational division:
It is the mitotic division results 2 daughter cells carrying same set of chromosomes as that of parent cell. No genetic variation occurs.

Question 18.
Can there be mitosis without DNA replication in S phase?
Answer:
There cannot be mitosis without DNA replication in 5 phase of interphase because the trigger for mitosis is disturbance of nucleocytoplasmic ratio caused by DNA replication in S phase. Mitosis restores the quantity of genetic material to the species-specific level.

Question 19.
How does anaphase of mitosis and anaphase I of meiosis differ from each other?
Answer:
In anaphase of mitosis chromatids separate while in anaphase 1 of meiosis homologous chromosomes separate.

Question 20.
How does cytokinesis in plant cells differ from that in animal cells?
Answer:
1. In an animal cell a furrow in the plasma membrane.lt joins in the centre and dividing the cell cytoplasm into two.

2. In-plant cells, wall formation starts in the centre of the cell and grows outward to meet the existing lateral walls. Then Cell division occurs.

Question 21.
How cytokinesis is different in an animal and a plant cell?
Answer:
In-plant cell cytokinesis occurs by cell plate formation while in the animal cell it occurs by cell furrow formation.

Question 22.
Why mitosis is called equational division ? Give the occurrence of mitosis.
Answer:
It keeps the chromosome number constant. It occurs in somatic cells.

Question 23.
What is the feature of a metacentric chromosome?
Answer:
The metacentric chromosome has a centromere in the middle region with two equal arms of the chromosome.

Question 24.
What is kinetochore? Give its function.
Answer:
It is a disc-like area in each chromatid and is site of attachment of spindle microtubule.

Question 25.
Why is meiosis essentially in sexually reproducing organisms?
Answer:
Meiosis reduces the chromosome number to half as it is followed by fertilization which restores diploidy.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 26.
Name the stage of cells cycle at which one of the following events occurs.

  1. Chromosomes are moved to spindle equator
  2. Centromere splits and chromatids separate
  3. Pairing between homologous chromosomes. takes place
  4. Crossing over between homologous chromosomes takes place.

Answer:

  1. Metaphase
  2. Anaphase
  3. Zygotene
  4. Pachytene

Question 27.
Downs syndrome and Klinefelter’s syndrome occurs due to mistake in cell division. What does it indicate?
Answer:
It is due to the failure of separation of homologous chromosomes during meiosis.

Question 28.
The events occur in prophase and telophase are one opposite to other,

  1. Name the cell structures shown the above events
  2. How many daughter nuclei are formed at the end of mitotic and meiotic prophase?

Answer:

  1. Nuclear membrane, nucleolus and spindle fibres
  2. Two

Question 29.
Mangolism or Trisomy is due to the failure of one event in cell division.

  1. Which is the improperly functioning stage?
  2. What is the event that not occurs?

Answer:

  1. Anaphase I of meiosis
  2. Separation of homologous chromosomes

Question 30.

  1. What will be the ploidy level of dyad and tetrad of cells in meiosis?
  2. How is it occurs?

Answer:

  1. Dyad – haploid, Tetrad – Haploid
  2. It occurs in meiosis due to separation of homologous chromosomes and chromosome number reduced to half.

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In which phase of meiosis is the following formed? Choose the answers from hint points given below.

  1. Synaptonemal complex ______
  2. Recombination nodules ______
  3. Appearance/activation of enzyme recombinase _____
  4. Termination of chiasmata _______
  5. Interkinesis ________
  6. Formation of dyad of cells ________

Answer:

  1. Zygotene
  2. pachytene
  3. pachytene
  4. diakinesis
  5. After Meiosis-I before meiosis II
  6. after first cytokinesis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 2.
The interphase stage is significant in mitotic and meiotic cell division

  1. Give one specific event
  2. Name the stage of interphase this event occurs
  3. How will you differentiate interphase from interkinesis?

Answer:

  1. DNA replication
  2. S – phase
  3. Interphase – cell prepares for cell division Interkinesis – short interval between meiosis I and meiosis II

Question 3.
The following events occur during the various phases of the cell cycle, Write the phase against each of the events.

  1. Appearance of nucleolus
  2. Division of centromere
  3. Replication of DNA

Answer:

  1. Telophase
  2. Anaphase
  3. Interphase

Question 4.
Life cycle of a cell is called cell cycle. ‘S’ phase is an important phase of cell cycle.

  1. Justify your answer.
  2. Name the stages of cell cycle at which the following events occur.
    • Crossing over of homologous chromosome.
    • Pairingof homologous chromosomes.
    • Chromosomes are arranged at the equatorial plane.

Answer:

  1. phase of DNA synthesis
  2. stages of the cell cycle
    • Pachytene
    • Zygotene
    • Metaphase

Question 5.
Name the stages of cell division in which the following events occur?

  1. Chromosomes are moved to spindle equator.
  2. Centromere splits and chromatids separate.
  3. Crossing over between homologous chromosomes takes place.

Answer:

  1. Metaphase
  2. Anaphase
  3. Pachytene

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 6.
Match the words listed in column I with suitable words from column II.

Column IColumn II
a) Diplontic cycle

b) Karyokinesis

c) Haplontic cycle

d) Cytokinesis

e) Meiosis

f)  Cell plate

i)  Meiocytes

ii) Gametic meiosis

iii)  Plant cells

iv) Nuclear division

v) Zygotic meiosis

vi) Cytoplasmic division

Answer:

  1. a) – Gametic meiosis
  2. b) – Nuclear division
  3. c) – Zygotic meiosis
  4. d) – Cytoplasmic division
  5. e) – Meiocytes
  6. f) – Plant cells

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division NCERT Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Distinguish cytokinesis from karyokinesis.
Answer:
The division of cytoplasm is called cytokinesis, while the division of the nucleus is called Karyokinesis.

Question 2.
What is G0 (quiescent phase) of cell cycle?
Answer:
Some cells in the adult animals do not appear to exhibit division (e.g., heart cells and many other cells divide only occasionally, as needed to replace cells that have been lost because of injury or cell death.

These cells do not divide further exit G1 phase to enter an inactive stage called quiescent stage (G0) of the cell cycle. Cells in this stage remain metabolically active but no longer proliferate unless called on to do so depending on the requirement of the organism.

Question 3.
Describe the event taking place during interphase.
Answer:
The interphase is divided into three further phases:
1. G1 phase (Gap 1). G1 phase corresponds to the interval between mitosis initiation of DNA replication. During G, phase the cell is metabolically active and continuously grows but does not replicate its DNA.

2. S phase (Synthesis). S or synthesis phase marks the period during which DNA synthesis or replication takes place.

3. During this time the amount of DNA per cell doubles. If the initial amount of DNA is denoted as 2C then it increases to 4C. However, there is no increase in the chromosome number, if the cell had diploid or 2n number of chromosomes at G1, even after S phase the number of chromosomes remains the same, i.e., 2n.

4. G2 phase (Gap 2). In animal cells, during the S phase, DNA replication begins in the nucleus, and the centriole duplicates in the cytoplasm during the G2 phase, proteins are synthesised in preparation for mitosis White cell growth continues.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 4.
Why is mitosis called equational division?
Answer:
Since the number of chromosomes remains same in parent and daughter cells so mitosis is also called a equational division.

Question 5.
Name the stage of cell cycle at which one of the following events occur.

  1. Chromosomes are moved to spindle equator.
  2. Centromere splits and chromatids separate.
  3. Pairing between homologous chromosomes takes place.
  4. Crossing over between homologous chromosomes takes place.

Answer:

  1. Metaphase
  2. Anaphase
  3. Metaphase I of meiosis
  4. Prophase I of meiosis

Question 6.
What is the significance of meiosis?
Answer:
Significance of Meiosis:

  1. Maintaining genetic identity by maintaining number of chromosomes.
  2. Bringing variations to ensure better species.
  3. Facilitates sexual reproduction.

Question 7.
Discuss with your teacher about.

  1. haploid insects and lower plants where cell division occurs, and
  2. Some haploid cells in higher plants where cell division does not occur.

Answer:

  1. Male bees, wasps and ants are haploid organisms because they are produced from unfertilized eggs.
  2. Synergids and antipodal cells in the ovule don’t undergo cell division.

Question 8.
Can there be mitosis without DNA replication in ‘S’ phase?
Answer:
DNA replication is necessary for cell division, and cell division cannot happen without DNA replication.

Question 9.
Can there be DNA replication without cell division?
Answer:
DNA replication takes place in order to prepare for cell division. Cell division is the next logical step after DNA replication.

Question 10.
Analyse the events during every stage of cell cycle and notice how the following two parameters change

  1. number of chromosomes (N) per cell
  2. amount of DNA content (C) per cell

Answer:

  1. Number of chromosomes remains same after mitotic cell division and becomes half after meiotic cell division.
  2. During S phase the DNA content doubles, but number of chromosomes remains the same.

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Cleavage is a unique form of mitotic cell division in which
(a) there is no growth of cells
(b) the nucleus does not participate
(c) no spindle develops to guide the cells
(d) the plasma membranes of daughter cells do not separate.
Answer:
(a) there is no growth of cells

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 2.
In animal cells, cytokinesis involves
(a) the separation of sister chromatids
(b) contraction of the contractile ring of microfilament
(c) depolymerisation of kinetochore microtubules
(d) a protein kinase that phosphorylates other enzymes
Answer:
(b) contraction of the contractile ring of microfilament

Question 3.
During mitosis, the number of chromosomes gets
(a) change
(b) no change
(c) maybe change if cell is mature
(d) maybe change if cell is immature
Answer:
(b) no change

Question 4.
A diploid living organism develops from zygote by which type of the following repeated cell divisions?
(a) Meiosis
(b) Amitosis
(c) fragmentation
(d) Mitosis
Answer:
(d) Mitosis

Question 5.
If you are provided with root-tips of onion in your class and are asked to count the chromosomes, which of the following stages can you most conveniently look into?
(a) Metaphase
(b) Telophase
(c) Anaphase
(d) Prophase
Answer:
(a) Metaphase

Question 6.
At which stage of mitosis, chromatids separated and passes to different poles
(a) prophase
(b) Metaphase
(c) anaphase
(d) Telophase
Answer:
(c) anaphase

Question 7.
The two chromatids of a metaphase chromosome represent
(a) replicated chromosomes to be separated at anaphase
(b) homologous chromosomes of a diploid set
(c) non-homologous chromosomes joined at the centromere
(d) maternal and paternal chromosomes joined at the centromere
Answer:
(a) replicated chromosomes to be separated at anaphase

Question 8.
The process of cytokinesis refers to the division of
(a) nucleus
(b) chromosomes
(c) cytoplasm
(d) nucleus and cytoplasm
Answer:
(c) cytoplasm

Question 9.
Which of the following serves as mitotic spindle poison?
(a) Ca2
(b) azide
(c) Tubulin
(d) Colchicine
Answer:
(d) Colchicine

Question 10.
Pairing of homologous chromosomes occurs at which stage?
(a) Zygotene
(b) Leptotene
(c) Metaphase
(d) Pachytene
Answer:
(a) Zygotene

Question 11.
In meiosis, division is
(a) I reductional and II equational
(b) I equational and II reductional
(c) Both reductional
(d) Both equational
Answer:
(a) I reductional and II equational

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 12.
Which type of chromosomes segregate when a cell undergoes meiosis?
(a) Homologous chromosomes
(b) Non-homologous chromosomes
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) centric and acentric chromosomes
Answer:
(a) Homologous chromosomes

Question 13.
Chiasmata are most appropriately observed in meiosis during
(a) diakinesis
(b) diplotene
(c) metaphase-ll
(d) pachytene
Answer:
(b) diplotene

Question 14.
During cell division, sometimes there will be failure of separation of homologous chromosomes. This event is called
(a) interference
(b) complementation
(c) non-disjunction
(d) coincidence
Answer:
(c) non-disjunction

Question 15.
The second meiotic division leads to
(a) separation of sex chromosomes
(b) fresh DNA synthesis
(c) separation of chromatids and centromere
(d) separation of homologous chromosomes.
Answer:
(c) separation of chromatids and centromere

Question 16.
Term meiosis was proposed by
(a) Farmer and Moore
(b) Flemming
(c) Strasburger
(d) Darlington
Answer:
(a) Farmer and Moore

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 17.
Synapsis occurs in the phase of meiosis.
(a) zygotene
(b) diplotene
(c) pachytene
(d) leptotene
Answer:
(a) zygotene

Question 18.
When the number of chromosomes is already reduced to half in the first reductional division of meiosis, where is the necessity of second meiotic division
(a) The division is required for the formation of four gametes
(b) Division ensures equal distribution of haploid chromosomes
(c) Division ensures equal distribution of genes on chromosomes
(d) Division is required for segregation of replicated chromosomes
Answer:
(d) Division is required for segregation of replicated chromosomes

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Students can Download Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Among the following which one is the most correct. JavaScript is used mostly at the
(a) client side
(b) server side
(c) client side and server side
Answer:
(a) client side

Question 2.
Name the tag that is used to embed scripts in a web page.
Answer:
<SCRIPT>

Question 3.
In JavaScript, a variable is declared using the keyword______.
Answer:
var

Question 4.
_____are small programs embedded in the HTML pages.
Answer:
Scripts

Question 5.
Who developed JavaScript?
Answer:
Brendan Eich

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 6.
_____are the scripts that are executed by the browser (client).
Answer:
Client Scripts

Question 7.
_____are the scripts that are executed by the web server.
Answer:
Server Scripts

Question 8.
_____Script is a platform-independent script.
Answer:
Java Script

Question 9.
______Script is a platform dependent script.
Answer:
VB Script

Question 10.
______makes the tags meaningful.
Answer:
Attribute

Question 11.
_____attribute specifies the name of the scripting language used.
Answer:
Language

Question 12.
State True or False. The identifiers are case sensitive Identifiers case.
Answer:
True

Question 13.
Which part of the browser executes the JavaScript.
Answer:
JavaScript engine

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 14.
Odd one out
(a) Google Chrome
(b) Internet Explorer
(c) Mozila FireFox
(d) C++
Answer:
(d) C++, It is a programming language others are browsers.

Question 15.
A group of codes with a name is called_____.
Answer:
function

Question 16.
To declare a function the keyword_____is used.
Answer:
function

Question 17.
A function contains a function____and function_____.
Answer:
header, body

Question 18.
State true or false
Even though a function is defined within the body section, it will not be executed, if it is not called.
Answer:
True

Question 19.
Write down the purpose of the following code snippet
function print()
{
document .write (“ Welcome to JS”);
}
Answer:
This code snippet is used to display the string, “Welcome to JS” on the screen(monitor).

Question 20.
From the following select which one is Not the data type in JavaScript
(a) Number
(b) String
(c) Boolean
(d) Time
Answer:
(d) Time

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 21.
_____keyword is used to declare a variable in JavaScript.
Answer:
var

Question 22.
______function is used to return the data type.
Answer:
typeof()

Question 23.
_____is a special data type to represent variables that are not defined using var.
Answer:
undefined

Question 24.
Odd one out
(a) +
(b) –
(c) %
(d) ==
Answer:
(d) ==, it is a relational operator the others are arithmetic operator.

Question 25.
Odd one out
(a) &&
(b) ||
(c) !
(d) %
Answer:
(d) %, it is an arithmetic operator, others are logical operator.

Question 26.
Odd one out
(a) <
(b) >
(c) ==
(d) !
Answer:
(d) ! , it is a logical operator, the others are relational operator.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 27.
Consider the following declaration var b;
From the following which value can be used for the variable b as boolean value.
(a) true
(b) TRUE
(c) True
(d) FALSE
Answer:
(a) true, The value is case sensitive.

Question 28.
Predict the output of the following.
var a, b;
a = ”0480″;
b = 2828159;
document.write(a+b);
Answer:
The out Put is “04802828159”. That is the string “0480” concatenates(joins) the number 2828159. The output is a string not a number.

Question 29.
Predict the output
var x, y;
x = ”8″;
y = 3;
document.write(x+y);
Answer:
The output is a string “83”; String addition means concatenation.

Question 30.
From the following which method is used to display a message (dialog box) on the screen.
(a) alert()
(b) isNaN()
(c) toUpperCase()
(d) toLowerCase()
Answer:
(a) alert()

Question 31.
Raju wants to convert a lower case text to Upper case text, which function is to be used.
Answer:
toUpperCase()

Question 32.
Christy wants to convert an upper case text to lower case text, which function is to be used.
Answer:
toLowerCase()

Question 33.
Andrea wants to check a value is a number or not. From the following which function is used for that.
(a) isNumb()
(b) isNaN()
(c) isNotNumb()
(d) isNotNumber()
Answer:
(b) isNaN().

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 34.
Predict the output of the following code snippet
var x=” HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(x.charAt(4));
Answer:
It displays a message box with character ‘E’ from the fifth (4 + 1) place

Question 35.
Read the following three statements regarding JavaScript.

  1. JavaScript can be used at the client side for data validation.
  2. JavaScript statements are case sensitive.
  3. JavaScript can be used only for creating web pages.

Answer:
All the three statements are correct.

Question 36.
Write the output of the following web page.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 1
Answer:
welcome welcome.

Question 37.
Following is the web page that accepts a string from a text box, converts in to uppercase and display it on the screen. Complete the missing portion in the page.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 2
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 3
Answer:
document.forml.text1.value

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 38.
Name the attribute of <SCRIPT> tag that is used to include an external JavaScript file into a web page.
Answer:
src

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A javaScript code has the following three variables and values.
x = “Script”;
y = “3”;
z = “2”;
Then match the following table.

AB
x.length()false
isNaN(x)5
isNaN(y)6
y + ztrue
32

Answer:

AB
x.length()6
isNaN(x)true
isNaN(y)false
y + z32

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 2.
“Placing JavaScript as an external file has some advantages”. Do you agree with this statement?
Why?
Answer:
External (another) JavaScript file:
We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading.

Question 3.
Explain the difference between the statements.
documerit.write (“welcome”);
and
alert (“welcome)”;
Answer:

  1. document.write () is a JavaScript command used to print anything on the browser window.
  2. document write (“welcome”) prints “welcome” on the browser window.
  3. alert (“welcome”). This is a built in function used to display a message here the message “welcome” in a separate window.

Question 4.
Is it necessary to use Language – ‘JavaScript” in the <SCRIPT>tag to specify the JavaScript code? Why?
Answer:
No, it is not nece^ary. If the language attribute is not specified, it will take the default value as Javascript.

Question 5.
Write the output of the following web page:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 4
Answer:
It will not display anything on the screen. This code snippet contains a function that will not do anything unless it is invoked(called).

Question 6.
Write the output of the following web page:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 5
Answer:

  • The output is as follows
  • welcome to JavaScript
  • welcome to JavaScript
  • The message repeats 2 times.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 7.
Among the following, identify the data types used in JavaScript
int, float, number, char, boolean, long
Answer:
From the list there is only two, number and boolean are the types used in JavaScript.

Question 8.
Write the output of the following web page and jus¬tify your answer.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 6
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 7
Answer:
x = “10” means x is a string variable
y = “20” means y is a string variable
x + y means the string x and y will be concatenated Hence it displays 1020.

Question 9.
What do you mean by Scripts? Explain?
Answer:
Scripts are small programs embedded in the HTML pages.
<SCRIPT> tag is used to write scripts The attributes used are

  • Type-To specify the scripting language
  • Src-Specify the source file
  • Two types of scripts
    1. Client scripts: These are scripts executed by the browser.
      Eg: VB Script, Javascript, etc.
    2. Server scripts: These are scripts executed by the server.
      Eg: ASP, JSP, PHP, Perl, etc.
  • The languages that are used to write scripts are known as scripting languages.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 10.
Suppose you have written a JavaScript function named checkData(). You want to execute the function when the mouse pointer is just moved over the button. How will you complete the following to do the same?
<INPUT Type=”button”_____= “checkData()”>
Answer:
<INPUT Type=”button” onMouseEnter = “checkData()”>

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Categorize the following as UpperCamelCase or lowerCamelCase and explain.
(a) DateOfBirth
(b) dateOfJoining
(c) timeOfJoining
(d) PlaceOfBirth
Answer:
a. CamelCase: An identifier does not use special characters such as space hence a single word is formed using multiple words. Such a naming method is called CamelCase (without space between words and all the words first character is in upper case letter).
These are two types

  1. Upper CamelCase: when the first character of each word is capitalised,
  2. lowerCamelCase: when the first character of each word except the first word is capitalised.

b. UpperCamelCase: DateOfBirth, PlaceOfBirth

c. lowerCamelCase: dateOfJoining, timeOfJoining

Question 2.
Explain the method of working of a JavaScript.
Answer:
Every browser has a JavaScript engine. If the code snippet contains JavaScript code, it is passed to the JavaScript engine for processing, the engine executes the code.

If there is no script then it processes without the help of script engine. Hence an HTML file without JavaScript is faster than with JavaScript code.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 3.
Write down the various data types used in JavaScript.
Answer:

  1. Number: Any number(whole or fractional) with or without sign.
    Eg: +1977,-38.0003,-100, 3.14157,etc
  2. String: It is a combination of characters enclosed within double quotes.
    Eg: “BVM”, “[email protected]”, etc
  3. Boolean: We can use either true or false.lt is • case sensitive. That means can’t use TRUE OR
    FALSE

Question 4.
Explain how a variable is declaring in JavaScript.
Answer:
For storing values you have to declare a variable, for that the keyword var is used. There is no need to specify the data type.
Syntax:
var<variable name1 > [, <variable name2>, <variable name3>,etc…]
Here square bracket indicates optional.
Eg: var x, y, z;
x= 11;
y = ”BVM”;
z = false;
Here x is of number type, y is of string and z is of Boolean type.

Question 5.
What are the different ways to add Scripts to a web page?
Answer:
The three different ways to add Scripts as follows

  1. Inside <BODY> section: Scripts can be placed inside the <BODY> section.
  2. Inside <HEAD> section: Scripts can be placed inside the <HEAD> section. This method is widely accepted method
  3. External (another) JavaScript file

We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 6.
Create a web page that checks whether a student has passed or not?
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 8
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 9

Question 7.
Create a web page to display the squares of first 10 numbers Sp <HTML>
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 10
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 11

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 8.
Create a web page to display even numbers upto 10.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 12

Question 9.
Following web page is used to show “Passed” or “Failed” based on a mark. Mark less than 30 is cosidered as failed. There are some errors in the code. Correct them.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 13
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 14

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the following declarations
var a, b, c, d;
a= “BVM”;
b=100;
c=true;
d=3.14157;
Predict the output of the following

  1. document.write(typeof(a)); (1)
  2. document.write(typeof(b)); (1)
  3. document.write(typeof(c)); (1)
  4. document.whte(typeof(d)); (1)
  5. document.write(typeof(e)); (1)

Answer:

  1. string
  2. number
  3. boolean
  4. number
  5. undefined

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 2.
Create a web page to print the day of a week
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 15
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 16
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 17

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 3.
What is an operator? Explain in detail.
Answer:
Operators are the symbols used to perform an operation.
1. Arithmetic operators:
It is a binary operator. It is used to perform addition(+), subtraction(-), division (/), multiplication(*), modulus(%-gives the remainder), increment(++) and decrement(—) operations.
Eg. If x=10 and y=3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 18
lf x=10 then
document.write(++x); → It prints 10+1=11
If x=10 then
document.write(x++); → It prints 10 itself.
If x=10 then
document.write(—x); It prints 10-1=9
lf x=10 then
document.write(x—); → It prints 10 itself.

2. Assignment operators:
If a=10 and b=3 then a=b. This statement sets the value of a and b are same, i.e. it sets a to 3.
It is also called short hands If X=10 and Y= 3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 19

3. Relational(Comparison) operators:
It is used to perform comparison or relational operation
between two values and returns either true or false.
Eg: If X=10 and Y=3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 20

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

4. Logical operators:
Here AND(&&), OR(||) are binary operators and NOT(!) is a unary operator. It is used to combine relational operations and it gives either true or false
If X=true and Y=false then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 21
Both operands must be true to get a true value in the case of AND(&&) operation
If X=true and Y=false then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 22
Either one of the operands must be true to get a true value in the case of OR(||) operation
If X= true and Y=false then

!X!Y
falsetrue

5. String addition operator(+):
This is also called concatenation operator. lt joins(concatenates)two strings and forms a string.
Eg: var x, y, z;
x= “BVM HSS;
y= “Kalparamba”;
z=x+y;
Here the variable z becomes “BVM HSS Kalparamba”.
Note: If both the operands are numbers then addition operator(+) produces number as a result otherwise it produces string as a result. Consider the following
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 23

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 4.
Write down the control structures used in JavaScript.
Answer:
Control structures in JavaScript. In general the execution of the program is sequential, we can change the normal execution by using the control structures.
1. simple if
Syntax:
if(test expression)
{
statements;
}
First the test expression is evaluated, if it is true then the statement block will be executed otherwise not.

if-else
Syntax:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 24
First the test expression is evaluated, if it is true then the statement block1 will be executed otherwise statement block? will be evaluated.

2. switch
It is a multiple branch statement. Its syntax is
given below.
switch(expression)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 25
First expression evaluated and selects the statements with matched case value.
Eg.
switch (n)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 26

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

3. for loop
If a statement wants to execute more than once.
Loop is used.
for loop is an entry controlled loop.
The syntax of for loop is given below
For(initialisation; testing; updation)
{
Body of the for loop;
}

4. while loop
If a statement wants to execute more than once.
Loop is used.
It is also an entry controlled loop The syntax is given below
Loop variable initialised
while(expression)
{
Body of the loop;
Update loop variable;
}
Here the loop variable must be initialised out side the while loop. Then the expression is evaluated if it is true then only the body of the loop will be executed and the loop variable must be updated inside the body. The body of the loop will be executed until the expression becomes false.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 5.
Write down the different mouse events used in JavaScript.
Answer:
Different mouse events and their description is given below

EventDescription
onClickIt occurs when the user clicks on an object by using mouse
onMouseEnterIt occurs when the mouse pointer is moved onto an object
onMouseLeaveIt occurs when the mouse pointer is moved out of an object
onKeyDownIt occurs when the user presses a key on the keyboard
onKeyUpIt occurs when the user releases a key on the keyboard

Question 6.
Create a web page that displays the capital of a state.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 27
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 28

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 29

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Let Us Practice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Develop a web page to display the following screen. (3 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 30
User can enter a number in the first text box. On clicking the show button, product of all numbers from 1 to the entered limit should be displayed in the second text box.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 31
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 32
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 33

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 2.
Develop a web to display the following screen. (5 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 34
User can enter a number in the first text box. On clicking the show button, Even or Odd should be displayed in the second text box depending on whetherthe number is even or odd.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 35
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 36

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 3.
Develop a web page to display the following screen. (5 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 37
The user can enter an age in the text box. If the user enters an alphabet, instead of a number in the text box, on clicking the show button, it should display a message “Invalid Age” to the user. Otherwise it should display a message “Correct Data”.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 38
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 39

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 4.
Develop a login page as shown in the following figure. (5 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 40
The page must contain one text box for entering the username and one password box for entering the password. The user name must contain at least 4 characters and the password must contain at least 6 characters. The first two characters in the password must be numbers. On clicking the show button, if the valid data are given in boxes, a message “Correct Data” should be displayed. Otherwise, “Wrong Data” message should be displayed.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 41
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 42
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 43

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 5.
Develop a web page to implement a simple calculator. The page should have two text boxes to enter two numbers. It should also have 4 buttons to add, subtract, multiply and divide the two numbers. The answer should be displayed in a third text box on clicking the button. The web page should be as shown in the following figure. (5 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 44
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 45
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 46
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 47

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 48

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Let Us Assess Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write the value of the variable z in each of the following. (5 Mark)
(a) var x, y, z;
x = 5;
y = 3;
z = ++x – y—;
Answer:
z = 6 – 3 = 3 Hence z=3.

(b) var x, y, z;
x = ”12″;
y = 13;
z = x+y;
Answer:
z = “12” + 13 = 1213. If one of the operand is a string the two strings concatenates the strings. That is it concatenates two strings.

(c) var x, y, z;
x = 20;
y = 8;
x % = y;
z = x++;
Answer:
x % = y means x = x%y.
that is x= 20 % 8.
i. e. x= 4.
Then z= 4. (x++ first use the value then change).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

(d) var x, y, z;
x = 1;
y = 4;
z = !(x<y);
Answer:
The answer is false. z = !(1 <4) z = !(true) z = false.

(e) var x, y, z;
x = 5;
y = 6;
Z = (x>y) || (y% 2 == 0);
Answer:
The answer is true.
Steps
z = (5>6) || (6%2==0)
= (false) || (0 == 0)
= (false) || (true)
= true.

Question 2.
Predict the output of the following. (5 Mark)
(a)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 49
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 50

(b)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 51
Answer:
The output is 2500.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

(c)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 52
Answer:
The output is 275.

(d)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 53
Answer:
The output is 120(5 factorial).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 3.
Following is an html code segment in a web page (1 Mark)
<FORM Name=”frmStud”>
<INPUT Type=”text” Name=”studentName”>
</FORM>
Fill in the blanks to store the value of the text box to the variable n.
var n;
n =______;
Answer:
n = document.frmstud.studentName.value;

Question 4.
Suppose you have written a JavaScript function named checkData(). You want to execute the function when the mouse pointer is just moved over the button. How will you complete the following to do the same? (1 Mark)
<INPUT Type=”button”_____= “checkData()”>
Answer:
<INPUT Type=”button” onMouseEnter= “checkData()”>

Question 5.
Explain <SCRIPT> tag and its attributes. (2 Mark)
Answer:
Scripts are small programs embedded in the HTML pages, to write scripts <SCRIPT> tag is used.
Language attribute specifies the name of the scripting language used.
Example:
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
_______
</SCRIPT>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 6 .
Write the syntax of a built in function in JavaScript. (5 Mark)
Answer:
Built in functions(methods)
1. alert(): This is used to display a message(dialogue box) on the screen.
eg: alert(“Welcome to JS”);

2. isNaN(): To check whether the given value is a number or not. It returns a Boolean value. If the value is not a number(NaN) then this function returns a true value otherwise it returns a false value.
Eg:

  • isNaN(“BVM”); returns true
  • isNaN(8172); returns false
  • isNaN(“680121”); returns false
  • alert(isNaN(8172); displays a message box as false.

3. toUpperCase(): This is used to convert the text to uppercase.
Eg:
var x=“bvm”;
alert(x.toUpperCase());
Output is as follows
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 54

4. toLowerCase(): This is used to convert the text to lower case.
Eg:
var x=“BVM”;
alert(x.toLowerCase());
Output is as follows
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 55

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

5. charAt(): It returns the character at a particular position.
Syntax: variable.charAt(index);
The index of first character is 0 and the second is 1 and so on.
Eg:
var x=”HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(x.charAt(4));
Output is as follows
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 56

Eg 2.
var x=”HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(“The characters @ first position is “+ x.charAt(0));
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 57

6. length property: It returns the number of characters in a string.
Syntax: variable.length;
Eg.
var x=”HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(“The number of characters is “+ x.length);
Output is as follows(note that space is a character)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 58

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 7.
Classify the following values in JavaScript into suitable data types. (3 Mark)
“Welcome”, “123”, “true”, 67.4, .98, false, “hello”
Answer:

  • Number: 67.4 and .98.
  • String: “Welcome”, “123″, “true” and “hello”.
  • Boolean: false.

Question 8.
What is meant by undefined data type in JavaScript mean? (2 Mark)
Answer:
undefined: It is a special data type to represent variables that are not defined using var.

Question 9.
Explain operators in JavaScript. (5 Mark)
Answer:
Operators in JavaScript. Operators are the symbols used to perform an operation
1. Arithmetic operators:
It is a binary operator. It is used to perform add i-tion (+), subtraction(-), division(/), multiplication(*), modulus(%-givesthe remainder), increment(++) and decrement(—) operations. Eg. If x = 10 and y = 3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 59
If x = 10 then
document.write(++x); → It prints 10+1=11
If x = 10 then
document.write(x++); → It prints 10 itself.
If x = 10 then
document.write(—x); It prints 10-1=9
If x = 10 then
document.write(x—);→ It prints 10 itself.

2. Assignment operators:
If a = 10 and b = 3 then a = b. This statement sets the value of a and b are same,i.e. it sets a to 3. It is also called short hands
lf X = 10 and Y = 3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 60

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

3. Relational(Comparison) operators:
It is used to perform comparison or relational operation between two values and returns either true or false.
Eg:
lf X = 10 and Y= 3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 62

4. Logical operators:
Here AND(&&), OR(||) are binary operators and NOT(!) is a unary operator. It is used to combine relational operations and it gives either true or false
If X = true and Y= false then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 63
Both operands must be true to get a true value in the case of AND(&&) operation If X = true and Y = false then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 64
Either one of the operands must be true to get a true value in the case of OR(||) operation If X = true and Y = false then

!X!Y
falsetrue

5. String addition operator(+):
This is also called concatenation operator. It joins (concatenates) two strings and forms a string.
Eg:
var x, y, z;
x= “BVM HSS”;
y= “Kalparamba”;
z = x + y;
Here the variable z becomes “BVM HSS Kalparamba”.
Note: If both the operands are numbers then addition operator(+) produces number as a result otherwise it produces string as a result. Consider the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 65
Eg:

  • 8(number) + 3(number) = 11 (Result is a number)
  • 8 (number)+ “3”( string) = “83″ (Result is a string)
  • “8” (string) + 3 (number) = “83”(Result is a string)
  • “8” (string) + “3” (string) = “83” (Result is a string).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 10.
Write JavaScript functions to perform the following (5 Mark)

  1. To check whether a variable N contains a number
  2. To convert the string “scert” to all capitals.
  3. To convert the string “HTML” to all small letters.
  4. To display a message “Welcome to functions”.
  5. To display the third character in the string “Computer”.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 66
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 67

2. <HTML>
<head>
<title>
check
</title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
function convert()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 68

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

3. <HTML>
<head>
<title>
check
</title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
function convert()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 69

4. <HTML>
<head>
<title>
check
</title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
function display()
{
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 70

5. <HTML>
<head>
<title>
check
</title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
function display()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 71

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 11.
Write JavaScript code to display the length of the string “Computer”. (3 Mark)
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
length of a string
</title>
</head>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
var str.len;
str=”Computer”;
len=str.length;
alert(“The length of the string Computer is “+len);
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 12.
A web page contains a putton. Write HTML code for the button which executes a function Message() on the occurance of the following events. (2 Mark

  1. When a user clicks the mouse on the button.
  2. When user moves the mouse over the button.

Answer:

  1. <input type=”button”value=”Message” onClick=”Message()”>
  2. <inputtype-button”value=”Message” onMouseEnter=”Message()”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 13.
What are the advantages of writing JavaScript code in the head section of an HTML page? (2 Mark)
Answer:
Scripts can be placed inside the <HEAD> section. This method is widely accepted method. The main reason for this is that body section contains a large volume of text contents to be displayed on the web page. More over the head section is loaded before the body section.

Question 14.
Design an HTML page that contains a text box to enter the marks in a given subject. (5 Mark)
(a) Write HTML code for this web page
(b) Provide validations for this text box in a separate JavaScript file and link it with the HTML file. The validations are

  • it should not be empty
  • it should be a number
  • it should be between 0 and 60.

(c) List the advantages of writing the script in a separate file.
Answer:
(a)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 72

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

(b) Step 1.
Take a Notepad and type the following and save it as check.js.
function checkData()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 73
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 74

Step 2.
Take another Notepad and type the following and save it as valid.html and execute valid.html file
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 75
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 76

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 77

(c) We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Students can Download Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption Questions and Answers, Plus One zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Plus One Digestion and Absorption One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Hepato-pancreatic duct opens into the duodenum and carries
(a) Bile
(b) Pancreatic juice
(c) Both bile and pancreatic juice
(d) Saliva
Answer:
(c) Both bile and pancreatic juice

Question 2.
One of the following is not a common disorder associated with digestive system
(a) Tetanus
(b) Diarrhea
(c) Jaundice
(d) Dysentery
Answer:
(a) Tetanus

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 3.
A gland not associated with the alimentary canal is
(a) Pancreas
(b) Adrenal
(c) Liver
(d) Salivary gland
Answer:
(b) Adrenal

Question 4.
Liver is the largest gland and is associated with various functions, choose one which is not correct
(a) Metabolism of carbohydrate
(b) Digestion of fat
(c) Formation of bile
(d) Secretion of  hormone called gastric
Answer:
(d) Secretion of hormone called gastric

Question 5.
Mark the right statement among the following
(a) Trypsinogen is an inactive enzyme
(b) Trypsinogen is secreted by intestinal mucosa
(c) Enterokinase is secreted by pancrease
(d) Bile contains trypsin
Answer:
(a) Trypsinogen is an inactive enzyme

Question 6.
The major health and nutritional problems mainly arises due to low amount of minerals and vitamins in diet. Name the two PEMs.
Answer:
Kwashiorkor, Marasmus

Question 7.
Deficiency symptoms of a disease are given below: Identify it.
Thin Limbs, retarded growth of body and brain, swelling of legs due to retention of water (oedema), reddish hair, pot belly and diarrhea.
Answer:
Kwashiorkor

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 8.
Find the set most suitable with “succus entericus”
(a) bilirubin and biliyerdin
(b) salivary amylase and lysozymes
(c) disaccharides, dipeptidases and lipases
(d) Trypsinogen, chymotrypsinogen procarboxypep-tidases
Answer:
(c) Disaccharides, dipeptidase and lipases

Question 9.
Complete the columns a, b, c, d, e & f

  1. Maltose _______a_______ + ________b_________
  2. Sucrose _______c_______ + ________d_________
  3. Lactose _______e_______ + ________f__________

Answer:

  1. Meltose Glucose + Glucose
  2. Sucrose Glucose + Fructose
  3. Lactose Glucose + Galactose

Question 10.
From this which statement is correct?
(a) Human denititian is heterodont
(b) Fat is soluble in water
(c) Fructose absorbed passively
(d) Small intestine devoid of villi
Answer:
(a) Human dentitian is heterodont

Question 11.
The human intestine is long because
(a) Bacteria in food can be killed gradually
(b) It increases surface are for absorption of food
(c) It provides more space for food storage
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) It increases surface area for absorption of food.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 12.
Which of the following statement is most suitable for gastrin?
(a) It stimulates the secretion of gastric juice.
(b) It stimulates the secretion of bile.
(c) It inhibits gastric gland to produce gastric secretion.
Answer:
(a) It stimulates the secretion of gastric juice.

Question 13.
Name the end product of digestion of following?

  1. Starch
  2. Protein

Answer:

  1. Glucose
  2. Amino acids

Plus One Digestion and Absorption Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Copy the diagram and label the parts.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 1
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 2

Question 2.
A 15 year old boy was admitted in a hospital with severe case of stomach ulcer. At the end of various tests it is found that Mucus glands are absent. Do you agree with this? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Yes. Highly concentrated HCL is presented in gastric juice. Mucus from the mucus gland protect the epithelium lining of the stomach from the action of HCL. So the absence of mucus gland cause stomach ulcer.

Question 3.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 3

  1. Name the process (a).
  2. Name the enzyme (b).
  3. Name the product (c).

Answer:

  1. (a) – bile salt – emulsification
  2. (b) – pancreatic lipase
  3. (c) – Glycerol

Question 4.
Distinguish between Renin and Rennin.
Answer:
1. Rennin: A proteolytic enzyme found in gastric juice of infants which helps in the digestion of milk proteins.

2. Renin: It is an enzyme releasing from JGA, when there is a fall in glomerular filtration rate. Renin converts angiotensinogen into antigotensin II and regulate urine formation.

Question 5.
Complete the passage.
Fatty acids and glycerol are first incorporated into small droplets called _______ which move into intestinal mucosa. They are reformed into very small _______ coated fat globules called _________ which are transported to the __________ in the villi.
Answer:
Fatty acids and glycerol are first incorporated into small droplets called micelles which move into intestinal mucosa. They are reformed into very small Protein coated fat globules called Chylomicrons which are transported to the lacteals in the villi.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 6.

  1. It is not necessary to produce amylase in an inactive form in our body, but it is not in the case of Trypsin.
  2. In certain circumstances, peptic ulcer are found on the gut wall.

Answer:

1. Proteins are body building molecules. If proteins digesting enzymes are secreted inactive forms, they would hydrolyse the cellular and extracellular proteins of the organism itself. So the protein-digesting enzyme trypsin is secreted in their inactive form.

2. Mucus and bicarbonates present in the gastric and intestinal secretion protects the gut wall from the action of HCL and protein-digesting enzymes. In the absence of mucus and bicarbonates, peptic ulcer are found on the gut wall.

Question 7.
Construct a flow chart showing the passage of food through the alimentary canal of man.
Answer:
Mouth → Pharynx → Oesophagus → Stomach → Small intestine → Large intestine → Rectum → Anus.

Question 8.
Differentiate between Serosa and Lumen.
Answer:
The outermost layer of the wall of alimentary canal is called serosa. The inner hollow space in the alimentary canal is called lumen.

Question 9.
Find the odd one out and justify your answer.
Salivary gland, milk gland, gastric gland, thyroid gland.
Answer:
Thyroid gland. Thyroid gland is an endocrine gland. All others are exocrine gland.

Question 10.
Give below in bracket are the names of some digestive enzymes group them into A – Gastric, B – Pancreatic and C – Intestinal (Trypsin, Dipeptidase, Rennin, Maltase, Pepsin, Chymotrypsin, Nuclease, Amylase)
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 4

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 11.
Ramu ate boiled rice, what are the changes that it undergoes before being absorbed in the small intestine.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 5

Question 12.
The dental formula of human is represented as \(i \frac{2}{2}\), \(\mathrm{C} \frac{1}{1}, \mathrm{Pm} \frac{2}{2}, \mathrm{m} \frac{3}{3}\). What do i, c, pm, m indicate?
Answer:
i – Incisors, c-Canines, pm – Pre molars, m – Molars

Question 13.
Describe the Diphyodont and Thecodont characteristics of human dentition.
Answer:
1. Thecodont: It is a dentition in which the teeth are placed in the sockets of jawbones.

2. Diphyodont: It is a dentition in which the teeth appear twice in the lifetime of man. They are milk teeth and permanent teeth.

Question 14.
Observe the figure given below and answer the following questions.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 6

  1. ‘x’ is a substance needed for digestion. What is the function of ‘x’?
  2. Name the gastrointestinal hormone responsible for the contraction of gall bladder to release ‘x’.

Answer:

  1. Bile – emulsification
  2. Cholecystokinin

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 15.
Given below are the layers of human gut. Write a flow chart from inner region.
Serosa, mucosa, muscularis, submucosa
Answer:
Mucosa → Submucosa → Muscularis → Serosa

Question 16.
After observing the model of the lumen of human intestine your friend said that “the villi projected into the lumen actually block the movement of food through the intestine, if the villi are absent food can easily pass through the intestine.” How will you respond to this comment?
Answer:
Villi actually decrease the movement of chyme. The function of villi is to increase the surface area of the intestine for the absorption of digested nutrients.

Question 17.
Out of the following list, pick out the enzymes that take part in carbohydrate digestion.
Maltase, Lactase, Sucrase, Peptidase, Salivary amylase, Isomaltase.
Answer:
Maltase, Lactase, Sucrase, Salivary amylase, Isomaltase

Question 18.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 7

  1. Mention the factor ‘x’ involved in the process.
  2. Identify the process and write its importance.

Answer:

  1. Bile salts
  2. Emulsification. The conversion large fat globules into tiny fat droplets is called emulsification. Bile salt helps emulsification. Emulsification increase the surface area for lipase action.

Question 19.
Below are given the names of the enzymes and their source of secretion. Match them.

EnzymesSource of secretion
AmylaseStomach
NucleasePancreas
LipaseSmall intestine
ProteaseSalivary gland

Answer:

EnzymesSource of secretion
AmylaseSalivary gland
NucleaseSmall intestine
LipasePancreas
ProteaseStomach

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 20.
Strong acidic food in the stomach stimulate the secretion of secretin from duodenal wall.

  1. On which part of the digestive tract, secretion act?
  2. What is the role of secreting in digestion?

Answer:

  1. Secretin acts on exocrine part of pancreas.
  2. Secretin stimulates secretion of water and bicarbonate ions from pancreas. It protects the intestinal mucosa from acid as well as provide an alkaline medium for enzymatic activity in intestine.

Question 21.
Fatty chyme in duodenum decreases the speed of peristalsis. How the fatty chyme affects the speed of peristalsis?
Answer:
Fatty chyme in duodenum stimulate the release of GIP (Gastric Inhibitory Peptide Hormone). GIP produced by duodenum, inhibit gastric mobility.

Question 22.
Mention whether the following statements true or false. Justify your answer.

  1. Chymotrypsin is a fat digesting enzyme.
  2. Deglutition occurs in the intestine.
  3. Intestinal juice is also known as succus entericus.
  4. Function of enterokinase is to break peptide bond in proteins.

Answer:

  1. False – It is prominent protein digesting enzyme present in pancreaticjuice.
  2. False – It is the process of swallowing of food . from the pharynx to oesophagus.
  3. True – The collective secretion of intestinal gland is known as intestinal juice or succus entericus.
  4. False – Enteokinase present in succus entericus activates the inactive trypsinogen into active trypsin.

Question 23.
The following diagram shows the action of protein digesting enzymes of pancreas.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 8

(a) Label the number 1, 2 and 3.
(b) Trypsinogen and Chymotrypsinogen are proenzymes (inactive enzymes). Why do they being produced inactive?

Answer:
(a) Label the number 1, 2 and 3.

  1. Enterokinase
  2. Chymotrypsin
  3. Peptides

(b) Trypsin and Chymotrypsin are protein digesting enzyme formed from their respective inactive forms at the time of digestion of the protein food. If they are available all time in active form, they would damage the intestinal wall.

Question 24.
The calorific value of respiratory substrates are different. Do you agree? Give reasons.
Answer:
Yes, The calorific values of carbohydrates, proteins and fats are 4.1 kcal /g, 5.65 kcal /g and 9.45 kcal /g, respectively.

Plus One Digestion and Absorption Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Gastric glands are formed of three types of secretory cells. Name them and mention their function.
Answer:

  1. Mucous cell – Secrete mucus
  2. Chief cells – Secrete proteolytic enzyme Pepsin
  3. Parietal cells – Secrete HCL

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 2.
Observe the flow chart and answer the questions.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 9

  1. What is the purpose of micelles in fat absorption?
  2. Identify ‘e’.

Answer:
1. Fatty acids and glycerol being insoluble, cannot be absorbed into the blood. They are first incorporated into small droplets called micelles which move into the intestinal mucosa. Micelles are formed with the help of bile salts and phospholipids,

2. Chylomicrons

Question 3.
Observe and analyse the graph and answer the following questions.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 10

  1. Which region of the alimentary canal has maximum acidic pH?
  2. Why different regions of alimentary canal has different pH How this is maintained?

Answer:
1. Stomach

2. pH is the buccal cavity – in between 6.5 and 7, which is maintained by HCO3 – in the saliva. pH in the stomach is in between 1.8 and 2, which is maintained by HCL, secreted from gastric gland. The pH in the intestine is in between 8 and 9, which is maintained by HCO3– present in the bile and pancreatic juice.

Question 4.
Observe the given diagram.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 11

  1. Identify the parts a, b, c.
  2. If part ‘c’ has removed from a person due to a disease. What will be the changes in the digestive process of that person?

Answer:
1. a – Liver, b – Gall bladder, c – Pancreas

2. If the pancreas is totally removed from a person, he will die in a short period. Even if pancreas is only partially removed it will collapse the digestive process. In addition to this, the body cannot regulate the glucose level in blood.

The digestive juice secreted by pancreas contains three enzymes trypsin, amylase and lipase. Thus if pancreas is removed, the production of digestive enzyme will collapse.

Question 5.
Complete the flow chart.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 12
Answer:
(a) Emulsification
(b) Pancreatic lipase
(c) Fatty acids
(d) Glycerol
(e) Micelles
(f) Chylomicrons

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 6.
Observe the diagram. Complete the boxes A, B and C appropriately.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 13
Answer:

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 14

Question 7.
Observe the diagram.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 15

  1. Identify the ducts A and B.
  2. B is guarded by a sphincter in its opening to duodenum. Name it.
  3. Write any two functions of liver.

Answer:

  1. Ducts A and B are
    • A – Common bile duct
    • B – Hepato – pancreatic duct
  2. Sphincter of Oddi.
  3. Functions of liver are:
    • Production and secretion of bile
    • Production of albumin, Fibrinogen, Prothrombin, etc.
    • Detoxification.

Question 8.
Given the diagram of intestinal villus.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 16

  1. Identify the part labelled as ‘a’ and ‘b’ in figure.
  2. Give the function of part ‘a’.
  3. What is the role of ‘b’ in digestion?

Answer:

  1. Identify the part labelled as ‘a’ and ‘b’ in figure
    • ‘a’ Lacteal
    • ‘b’ Crypts of Liberkuhn
  2. Absorption of fat and fat soluble vitamins.
  3. Crypts of Lieberkuhn produce intestinal juice helps in digestion.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 9.
Find the odd one out from each group and justify.

  1. Cardiac, Villi, Fundic, Pyloric
  2. Duodenum, Jejunum, ileum, villi
  3. Parotid, gastric, sublingual, submaxillary

Answer:

1. Villi:
Cardiac, fundic and pyloric are the three major parts of stomach. But villi are small finger like foldings in the intestine.

2. Villi:
Duodenum, jejunum and ileum are three regions of intestine but villi are small finger like foldings inside the intestine.

3. Gastric:
Parotid, Sublingual and submaxillary are three pairs of salivary gland produce saliva. But gastric gland is stomach gland produce gastric juice.

Plus One Digestion and Absorption NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer among the following:

  • Gastricjuice contains
    1. pepsin, lipase and rennin
    2. trypsin, lipase and rennin
    3. trypsin, pepsin and lipase
    4. trypsin, pepsin and rennin
  • Succus entericus is the name given to
    1. a junction between ileum and large intestine
    2. intestinal juice
    3. swelling in the gut
    4. appendix

Answer:

  • Gastricjuice contains
    1. Pepsin, Lipase and Rennin
  • Succus entericus is the name given to
    2. Intestinal Juice

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 2.
Match column I with and Rennin
Column I Column II

Column IColumn II
(a) Bilirubin and biliverdin(i) Parotid
(b) Hydrolysis of starch(ii) Bile
(c) Digestion of fat(iii) Lipases
(d) Salivary gland(iv) Amylases

Answer:
(a) – (ii), (b) – (iv), (c) – (iii), (d) – (i)

Question 3.
Why are villi present in the intestine and not in the stomach?
Answer:
The major portion of absorption takes palce in small intestines. In stomach simple sugars, water and alcohol absorbed. Villi are specialized projections in small intestine with large absorbent area. This facilities better absorbtion of complex molecules as well.

As food is fit to be absorbed only after complete digestion so villi’s turn comes after all the digestive processes are complete.

Question 4.
State the role pancreatic juice in digestion of proteins.
Answer:
The pancreatic juice contains inactive enzymes – trypsinogen, chymotrypsinogen, procarboxypetidases, amylases, lipases and nucleases. Trypsinogen is activated by an enzyme, enterokinase, secreted by the intestinal mucosa into active trypsin which in turn activities the other enzymes in the pancreatic juice.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 17

Question 5.
Describe the process of digestion of protein in stomach.
Answer:
The proenzyme pepsinogen, on exposure to hydrochloric acid gets converted into the active enzyme pepsin, the proteolytic enzyme of the stomach. Pepsin converts proteins into proteoses and peptones (peptides).

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 18

Question 6.
Give the dental formula of human beings.
Answer:
Arrangement of teeth in each half of the upper and lower jaw in the order I, C, PM, M is represented by a dental formula which in human is as follows:
\(\frac{2123}{2123}\)

Question 7
Bile juice contains no digestive enzymes, yet it is important for digestion. Why?
Answer:
Bile emulsifies the fat making it easier digest by enzymes. Bile juice also helps inactivation of lipase, the enzyme which digests fat. Additionally, bile converts the acidic chyme to alkaline so that other enzymes can work on food.

Question 8.
Describe the digestive role of chymotrypsin. Which two other digestive enzymes of the same category are secreted by its source gland?
Answer:
Chymotrypsin digests proteins and converts it into dipeptides. Other digestive enzymes of the same category are Trypsin and Carboxypeptidase and they perform similar function.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 9.
Discuss the main steps in the digestion of proteins as the food passes through different parts of the alimentary canal.
Answer:
In the stomach the proenzyme pepsinogen gets converted into pepsin which acts on protein to convert it into peptone.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 19
In small intestine enzymes Chymotrypsin, trypsin and carboxypeptdase do the rest of the digestion of protein.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 20

Question 10.
Explain the term thecodont and diphyodont.
Answer:
Thecodont. In human beings each tooth is embedded in a socket of jaw bone. This type of attachment is called the codont.

Diphyodont. Majority of mammals including human beings form two sets of teeth during their life, a set of temporary milk or deciduous teeth replaced by a set of permanent or adult teeth. This type of dentition is called diphyodont.

Question 11.
Name different types of teeth and their number in an adult human.
Answer:
An adult human has 32 permanent teeth which are four different types (Heterodont dentition)

Plus One Digestion and Absorption Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In intestine, food materials are absorbed through
(a) villi
(b) subtentacular cells
(c) sub-mucosa
(d) gastric glands
Answer:
(a) villi

Question 2.
Diastema refers to
(a) gap between the teeth
(b) gap between tongue and teeth
(c) ciliary cells on alimentary wall
(d) cell lining along pharynx
Answer:
(a) gap between the teeth

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 3.
Pylorus is present between
(a) small and large intestine
(b) pancreas and small intestine
(c) oesophagus and stomach
(d) stomach and duodenum
Answer:
(d) stomach and duodenum

Question 4.
Elephant tusks are
(a) molars
(b) canines
(c) incisors
(d) premolars
Answer:
(c) incisors

Question 5.
Which of the following cells produce HCL
(a) beta-cells
(b) alpha-cells
(c) Oxyntic cells
(d) Chief cells
Answer:
(c) Oxyntic cells

Question 6.
Most abundant mineral of animal body is
(a) iron
(b) sodium
(c) potassium
(d) calcium
Answer:
(d) calcium

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 7.
Bile salts act as activator of which enzyme?
(a) Pepsinogen
(b) Trypsinogen
(c) Lipase
(d) Pancreatic amylase
Answer:
(c) Lipase

Question 8.
When breast feeding is replaced by less nutritive food low in proteins and calories; the infants below the age of one year are likely to suffer from
(a) marasmus
(b) rickets
(c) kwashiorkor
(d) pellagra
Answer:
(a) marasmus

Question 9.
Which one of the following pairs of food components in humans reaches the stomach totally undigested?
(a) protein and starch
(b) Starch and fat
(c) fat and cellulose
(d) Starch and cellulose
Answer:
(c) fat and cellulose

Question 10.
A young infant may be feeding entirely on mother’s milk, which is white in colour but the stools, which the infant passes out is quite yellowish. This yellow colour is due to
(a) intestinal juice
(b) bile pigments passed through bile juice
(c) undigested milk protein casein
(d) pancreaticjuice poured into duodenum
Answer:
(b) bile pigments passed through bile juice

Question 11.
Which one of the following statements is true regarding digestion and absorption of food in humans?
(a) Oxyntic cells in our stomach secrete the proenzyme pepsinogen
(b) Fructose and amino acids arc abosrbed through intestinal mucosa with the help of carrier ions like Na+
(c) Chylomicrons are small lipoprotein particles that are transported from intestine into blood capillaries
(d) About 60°o of starch is hydrolysed by salivary amylase in our mouth
Answer:
(c) Chylomicrons are small lipoprotein particles that are transported from intestine into blood capillaries

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 12.
Secretin and cholecystokinin are digestive hormones. They are secreted in
(a) oesophagus
(b) ileum
(c) pancreas
(d) duodenum
Answer:
(d) duodenum

Question 13.
FAD is a coenzyme derived from
(a) riboflavin
(b) vitamin-B12
(c) thiamine
(d) niacin
Answer:
(b) vitamin-B12

Question 14.
The pH of the digestive juices within the human small intestine is between 7.5 and 8.5. This environment is slightly.
(a) basic
(b) acidic
(c) neutral
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) basic

Question 15.
Lipids, which can be found in oil based salad dressings and ice cream, during digestion are splitted into
(a) fatty acids and glycerol
(b) glycerol and amino acids
(c) glucose and fatty acids
(d) glucose and amino acids
Answer:
(a) fatty acids and glycerol

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 16.
Crypts of Leiberkuhn are involved in
(a) secretion of succus entericus
(b) secretion of rennin
(c) secretion of ptyalin
(d) digestion of food
Answer:
(a) secretion of succus entericus

Question 17.
Which of the following is an organic molecule needed by the body in small amounts?
(a) Protein
(b) Zinc
(c) Vitamin-C
(d) Monosaccharide
Answer:
(c) Vitamin-C

Question 18.
Which one is not true about vitamins?
(a) Vitamins are organic catalysts
(b) Vitamins are indispensable for life
(c) Vitamins act as a source of energy
(d) Tocopherol is anti-sterility vitamin
Answer:
(c) Vitamins act as a source of energy

Question 19.
The malnutrition disease in man is
(a) Cridu chat syndrome
(b) Klinefelter’s syndrome
(c) Potbelly syndrome
(d) Edward’s syndrome
Answer:
(c) Potbelly syndrome

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 20.
The process of resynthesis of food materials from simpler food molecules is called
(a) biosynthesis
(b) catabolism
(c) absorption
(d) assimilation
Answer:
(a) biosynthesis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Students can Download Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which organelle is not a part of the endomembrane system?
(a) lysosome
(b) vacuole
(c) mitochondria
(d) Golgi complex
Answer:
(c) mitochondria

Question 2.
Smooth endoplasmic reticulum is well developed in cells which synthesise
(a) steroids
(b) proteins
(c) carbohydrates
(d) all of these
Answer:
(a) steroids

Question 3.
The type of ribosome found in prokaryotes is
(a) 70 S
(b) 80 S
(c) 60 S
(d) 50 S
Answer:
(a) 70 S

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 4.
Who proposed the fluid mosaic model of plasma membrane in 1972?
(a) Singer and Nicolson
(b) Rober Hooke
(c) Rrobertsons model
(d) Camilo golgi
Answer:
(a) Singer and Nicolson

Question 5.
An organelle with internal cross section showing the characteristic 9 + 2 arrays is
(a) microtubule
(b) microfilament
(c) cilia and flagellum
(d) tubulin
Answer:
(c) cilia and flagellum

Question 6.
Smaller, lipid-soluble molecules diffuse faster through cell membrane, but the movement of hydrophilic substances are facilitated by certain biomolecules named as ____________
Answer:
Proteins.

Question 7.
Name the cell organelle rich in acid hydrolase.
Answer:
Lysosome

Question 8.
Name the stacked particle present on the inner sur¬face of inner mitochondrial membrane.
Answer:
Oxysomes

Question 9.
Give the chemical nature of ribosomes.
Answer:
rRNAs and proteins

Question 10.
Observe the relationship between the first two terms and fill up the blanks.

  1. Mitochondria: Cristae
    Chloroplast: ……….
  2. Moss: Capsule
    Fern: ………….

Answer:

  1. Grana
  2. Sporangium

Question 11.
Mark the odd one out.

  1. Nucleus; Nucleoli; Centriole; Chromosome
  2. Family, class, taxon, phylum

Answer:

  1. Centriole
  2. Taxon

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 12.
Name the protein associated with chromosomes.
Answer:
Histones

Question 13.
The cell wall of Bacterium is made up of
(a) Cellulose
(b) Hemi cellulose
(c) Lignin
(d) Peptidoglycan
Answer:
(d) Peptidoglycan.

Question 14.
ETS is associated with F0-F1 particles and many respiratory enzymes. What is the role of F0-F1 particles in mitochondria?
Answer:
ATP synthesis

Question 15.
Why is nucleus called the director of the cell?
Answer:
It controls and coordinates all the cellular functions.

Question 16.
What will you call a cell not having ER, Golgi body, mitochondria, nuclear membrane, etc.
Answer:
Prokaryotic cell

Question 17.
Which organelles are called ribonucleoprotein particles of the cell?
Answer:
Ribosome

Question 18.
Name which cell organelle is associated with secretory activity.
Answer:
Golgi body

Question 19.
Identify the powerhouse of a cell. Give justification.
Answer:
Mitochondria – synthesis of ATP

Question 20.
Which of the following is not true of a eukaryotic cell?
(a) It has 80S type of ribosome present in the mitochondria
(b) It has 80S type of ribosome present in the cytoplasm
(c) Mitochondria contain circular DNA
(d) Membrane-bound organelles are present
Answer:
(a) lt has 80S type of ribosome present in the mitochondria.

Question 21.
Which of the following statements is true for a secretory cell?
(a) Golgi apparatus is absent
(b) Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum (RER) is easily observed in the cell
(c) Only Smooth Endoplasmic Reticulum (SER) is present
(d) Secretory granules are formed in nucleus.
Answer:
(b) Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum (RER) is easily observed in the cell

Question 22.
Name the compound which gives fluidity and functional specificity to biomembranes.
Answer:
Fluidy by lipids and functional specificity by proteins

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 23.
Which of the following is correct?

  1. Cells of all living organisms have a definite nucleus
  2. Both animal and plant cells have a well-defined cell wall.

Answer:

  1. false
  2. false

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
While studying the stages of meiosis following features observed at one stage.

  1. Pairing of homologous chromosomes.
  2. Formation of synaptonemal complex. Identify the stage.

Answer:

  1. Zygotene
  2. Pachytene

Question 2.
Make a list of organelles that function as the cytoskeleton.
Answer:
The endoplasmic reticulum, microtubules, microfilaments, and intermediate fibers.

Question 3.
Name two cell organelles that are double membrane-bound. Write the main functions of each.
Answer:

  1. Chloroplast- Photosynthesis
  2. Mitochondria – cellular respiration

Question 4.
Name the cell organelles in the cell which act as the following.

  1. Protein factories
  2. Powerhouse
  3. Disposal unit
  4. Control centres

Answer:

  1. Ribosome
  2. Mitochondria
  3. Lysosomes
  4. Nucleus

Question 5.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter in an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img1
Answer:
1) Ribosome – 70S
2) Porin – Protein
3) Lignin – Secondary wall
4) Nucleus – Chromosome

Question 6.
Bacterial cell envelope is a complex structure. It is made up of various layers. Name the different layers in the Bacterial cell envelope.
Answer:
Glycocalyx, cell wall, and plasma membrane.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 7.
Pick up the odd one and state reason for your answer.
Golgi bodies, Nucteolus, Nucleus, Lysosome.
Answer:
Nucleolus. Remaining three are major cell organells seen in cytoplasm.

Question 8.
Mitochondria is called powerhouse of the cell. Comment.
Answer:
Mitochondria are the centres of production, storage, and distribution of energy for various metabolic activities of cell.

Question 9.
Table which shows a comparison of cell organisation in prokaryotes and eukaryotes. Complete the table.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img2
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img3

Question 10.
Observe the diagrams of two different phases of mitosis given below and write their names..
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img4
Answer:

  • A- Metaphase
  • B – Anaphase

Question 11.
Interphase in cell cycle is referred to as resting phase. Do you consider this statement true? Substantiate your answer.
Answer:
No. Synthesis of DNA, RNA & Protein occurs hence it is active stage.

Question 12.
Some statements related to certain cell organelles are given in column A. Identify the organelles and give their names correctly against each statement in column B.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img5
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img6

Question 13.
How RER is different from SER?
Answer:

  1. RER – Rough endoplasmic reticulum
    Contains ribosomes – protein synthesis
  2. SER – Smooth endoplasmic reticulum
    Devoid of ribosome – lipid synthesis & storage

Question 14.
Most accepted model of Biomembrance is best referred as ‘Protein Icebergs in the sea of Lipid”.

  1. Name the most accepted structural model for the Biomembrane.
  2. Who proposed it?

Answer:

  1. Fluid mosaic model
  2. Singer & Nicholson

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 15.
Functions and names of organells are given below arrange them into a table.
Mitochondria, Endoplasic reticulum, Ribosome, Chloroplast, protein synthesis, storage of energy, cytoskeleton, photosynthesis.
Answer:

  • Mitochondria – Storage of energy
  • Endoplasmic reticulum – Cytoskeleton
  • Ribosome – Protein synthesis
  • Chloroplast – Photosynthesis

Question 16.
Identify the given diagram. Copy and label the parts.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img7
Answer:

  • 1 – Stroma
  • 4 – Fret channels

Question 17.
Match the following.

AB
CristaeChloroplast
ZygoteneGolgi apparatus
MesosomeSynapsis
ThylakoidMitochondria
CisternaePlasma membrane

Answer:

CristaeMitochondria
ZygoteneSynapsis
MesosomePlasma membrane
ThylakoidChloroplast
CisternaeGolgi apparatus

Question 18.
Different types of chromosomes based on the position of centromere are given below.

  1. Classify them with necessary explanation.
  2. What is the peculiarity of the chromosome “C”?

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img8
Answer:
1.

  • A – Acrocentric chromosome – The centromere is near the end of the chromosome.
  • B – Sub-metacentric chromosome – the centromere is near the middle of the chromosome.
  • C – Metacentric chromosome – The centromere is at the middle of the chromosome,

2. It has both secondary constriction and a satellite.

Question 19.
Name the organelles which act as the following.

  1. cell’s circulatory system
  2. protein factories
  3. powerhouse
  4. disposal units
  5. control centres

Answer:

  1. Endoplasmic reticulum
  2. Ribosomes
  3. Mitochondria
  4. Lysosomes
  5. Nucleus

Question 20.
Different types of chromosomes based on the position of centromere are given below. Classify them with necessary explanation. What is the peculiarity of the chromosome “D”?
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img9
Answer:

  1. A- metacen trie – media nee centromere/Satel I ite chromosome.
  2. B – sub metacentric – centromere just away from median position
  3. C – acrocentric
  4. D – Telocentric – Centromere close to the end or terminal

Question 21.
Membrane-bound distinct structures are called organelle. An organelle that is not bounded by membrane is seen in the chloroplast and mitochondria.

  1. Identify cell organelle.
  2. Write down its functions.

Answer:

  1. Ribosome
  2. Protein synthesis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 22.
Different cells have different sizes. Arrange the following cells in ascending order of their size. Choose the correct option among the following.
i. Mycoplasma
ii. Ostrich eggs
iii. Human RBC
iv. Bacteria
Answer:
i – iv – iii – ii

Question 23.
Is extra genomic DNA present in prokaryotes and eukaryotes? If yes, indicate their location in both the types of organisms.
Answer:
It is present in cytoplasm of prokaryotes called plasmids

Question 24.
The genomic content of the nucleus is constant for a given species whereas the extrachromosomal DNA is found to be variable among the members of a population. Explain.
Answer:

  • Transfer of hereditary characters from one generation to next takes place with the help of nucleus. But
  • extrachromosomal DNA is not under the control of nuclear DNA its copy number varies in different organism.

Question 25.
Briefly give the contributions of the following scientists in formulating the cell theory.

  1. Robert Virchow
  2. Schielden and Schwann

Answer:

  1. Omnis cellula-e-cellular means new cells arise from pre-existing cells. It is the contribution of Rudolf Virchow.
  2. They have independently formulated the concept of cell theory i.e all cells are composed of cells and their products.

Schielden and Schwann-botanist and zoologist respectively.

Question 26.
Since the functions of certain membranous organelles are coordinated they are considered together as endomembrane system. Name the organelles included in this group.
Answer:
Endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi apparatus, Lysosome, and vacuole.

Question 27.
An organelle is called “The powerhouse of the cell”

  1. Name the organelle.
  2. Why is it said so?

Answer:

  1. Mitochondria
  2. Here the Energy (ATP) production, storage, and distribution takes place. So it is called a powerhouse of the cell.

Question 28.
The fluid mosaic model is a widely accepted model of cell membrance. Why?. Who proposed this model?
Answer:
It is the model of the plasma membrane consists of proteins and phospholipid bilayer. It is otherwise known as protein and iceberg in a sea of lipids. Singer and Nicolson

Question 29.
Match the column A, B & C Appropriately
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img10
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img11

Question 30.
A non-membrane cell organelles is common to both prokaryotes and eukaryotes.

  1. Which is that cell organelle?
  2. What is its function?

Answer:

  1. Ribosome
  2. It helps in protein synthesis. Ribosome is the protein synthesising machinery in both prokaryotes & Eukaryotes.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 31.
While looking through the microscope Ramesh saw few organisms. Help him to distinguish these organisms into Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes.
Answer:

  • Prokaryotic organisms are single celled but without definite nucleus.
  • Eukaryotic organisms are many celled with definite nucleus.

Question 32.
Cancer cells have numerous ribosomes’ Comment.
Answer:
Cancer cells undergoes uncontrolled and unwanted multiplication. It requires protein in large amounts. Hence numerous ribosomes are found in cancer cells.

Question 33.

AB
a. Ribosomesphotosynthesis
b. Golgi Apparatushydrolytic enzymes
c. Lysosomesprotein synthesis
d. Plastidsglycolipids

Answer:

AB
Ribosomesprotein synthesis
Gogi apparatusGlycolipids
LysosomeHydrolytic enzyme
PlastidsPhotosynthesis

Question 34.
What is a tonoplast?
Answer:

  1. Outer membrane of mitochondria
  2. Inner membrane of chloroplast
  3. Membrane boundary of the vacuole of plant cells
  4. Cell membrane of a plant cell
  5. Membrane boundary of the vacuole of plant cells

Question 35.
What structural and functional attributes must a cell have to be called a living cell?
Answer:
Living cell must possess cell membrane and protoplasm (cytoplasm and nucleus)

Question 36.
What is a mesosome in a prokaryotic cell? Mention its function?
Answer:

  • Mesosome is the infoldings of plasma membrane of gram +bacteria.
  • Respiration, wall formation, DNA replication and distribution to daughter cells

Question 37.
Multicellular organisms have division of labour Explain.
Answer:
In multicellular organisms .different cells become specialized in their structure to perform a specialized function by coordinating to form different types of tissues that coordinate to form different organs. Each organ is specialized to perform a specific function.

Question 38.
Give the significance of osmosis.
Answer:
It helps in the absorption of water by roots, opening, and closing of stomata, seed germination, etc.

Question 39.
Why is ER called cell circulatory system?
Answer:
Because it helps in transportation of materials between cytoplasm and nuclueus.

Question 40.
What are thylakoids? Why are these called structural and funcional unit of chloroplasts?
Answer:

  • They are oval shaped sacs which lie superimposed in the stroma of chloroplast to form grana.
  • These have enzymes for photochemical reactions of photosynthesis as have chlorophyll-containing quatasomes.

Question 41.
Name two cell-organelles that are double membrane-bound. What are the characteristics of these two organelles? State their functions.
Answer:
Golgi body and Endoplasmic reticulum (ER)
1. Golgi body:

  • It perform the function of packaging materials.
  • The site of formation of glycoproteins and glycolipids.

2. Endoplasmic reticulum:

  • RER type involved in protein synthesis and secretion.
  • SER is the major site of synthesis of lipids.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 42.
In some bacteria cell envelope consists of loose layer but in others, it appears as thick and tough layer. Name the two types of layers.
Answer:

  • Loose layer – slime layer
  • Thick and tough layer – Capsule

Question 43.
Phospho lipid bilayer with peripheral and integral proteins are arranged and forms quasifluid nature is found in almost all organisms.

  1. Which is the best method explains the above statement?
  2. Give its function.

Answer:

  1. Fluid mosaic concept
  2. Transport of molecules

Question 44.
The cross-section of cilia/flagella shows 9 + 2 arrangement and 9 + 0 in centriole.

  1. What is the difference between the above two arrangements?
  2. What is the function of cilia and centriole?

Answer:

  1. In first case 9 doublet fibrils with 2 singlet fibrils and in the second case 9 triplet fibrils but no central fibrils
  2. cilia helps in locomotion and centriole helps in assembly of spindle apparatus.

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How do neutral solutes move to cross the plasma membrane? Can the polar molecule also move across it in the same way? If not then how are these transported across the membrane?
Answer:
1. Neutral solutes move across the plasma membrane by diffusion along the concentration gradient.

2. Polar molecule cannot move across it in the same way. Polar molecules require a carrier protein of the membrane to facilitate their transport across the membrane.

3. Some ions or molecules are transported across the membrane against their concentration gradient, which is an energy-dependent process. It is called active transport.

Question 2.
When a 5% glucose solution and an 8%glucose solution are separated by a semipermeable membrane, explain

  1. Which solution has a greater osmotic pressure
  2. In which direction osmosis occurs
  3. Which solution will increase in volume

Answer:

  1. 8% glucose solution
  2. 5 – 8% glucose solution
  3. 8% glucose solution

Question 3.
Structure of a chloroplast is given below. Write the parts in the place of numbers.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img12
Answer:

  1. Stroma
  2. Lamella
  3. Granum
  4. Fret
  5. Periplastidial space

Question 4.
Differentiate the following terms:

  1. Polysome and Mesosome
  2. Amyloplast and Aleuroplast
  3. RER and SER

Answer:
1. Polysome contains ribosome – Protein synthesis
Mesosome – cellular respiration

2. Aleuroplast-store Protein
Amyloplast – store Starch

3. RER- Rough endo plasmic reticulum
SER – Smooth endoplasmic reticulum

Question 5.
Match the terms in column A & B.

AB
1. Polyribosome1. Peroxisomes
2. Oxysomes2. Lysosomes
3. Photorespiration3. Centiole
4. Grana4. Protein synthesis
5. Acid hydrolysis5. Thylakoids
6. Spindle fibres6. Cristae

Answer:

AB
Polyribosomeprotein synthesis
Oxysomescristae
Photorespirationperoxisomes
Granathylakoids
Acid hydrolaseslysosomes
Spindle fiberscentriole

Question 6.
Match the following.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img13
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img14

Question 7.
Identify the statement given below is true /false.

  1. Robert Brown discovered cell.
  2. Schleiden and 9chwann formulated cell theory.
  3. Virchow explained that cells are formed from preexisting cells.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. True

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 8.
Some cell organells are given below Endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, mitochondria, chloroplast, vacuole, lysosome, microbodies, and centriole

  1. Identify the cell organelles belongs to the endomembrane system.
  2. Differentiate the cell organelles into membrane-bound and non-membrane bound.
  3. which is the cell organelle only found in animal cell but not in a plant cells.

Answer:
1. Endoplasmic reticulum, golgi complex .vacuole, lysosome
2.

Membrane-boundnon-membrane-bound
Endoplasmic reticulum

Golgi complex

Mitochondria

Chloroplast

Vacuole

Lysosome

Centriole

3. centriole

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which of the following is not correct?
(a) Robert Brown discovered the cell.
(b) Schleiden and Schwann formulated the cell theory.
(c) Virchow explained that cells are formed from preexisting cells.
(d) A unicellular organism carries out its life activities within a single cell.
Answer:
(a) Robert Brown discovered the cell.

Question 2.
Match the following.

Column IColumn II
a) Cristaei) Flat membranous sacs in the stroma
b) Cistenaeii) Infoldings in mitochondria
c) Thylakoidsiii) Disc-shaped sacs in Golgi apparatus

Answer:

Column IColumn II
a) Cristae.i) Infoldings in mitochondria
b) Cristinaii) Disc-shaped sacs in Golgi apparatus
c) Thylakoidsiii) Flat membranous sacs in the stroma

Question 3.
What is a mesosome in a prokaryotic cell? Mention the functions that it performs.
Answer:
In prokaryotes, the extension of plasma membrane into cell makes a membranous structure called mesosoma. They help in cell wall formation and DNA replication.

Question 4.
How do neutral solutes move across the plasma membrane? Can the polar molecules also move across it in the same way? If not, then how are these transported across the membrane?
Answer:
Neutral solutes move across the plasma membrane through osmosis. On the other hand, polar molecules cannot pass through the non-polar membrane. They require a carrier protein to help them to move across the membrane. Such transport requires energy and is called active transport.

Question 5.
What is stomatal apparatus? Explain the structure of stomata with a labelled diagram.
Answer:
Stomata are structures present in the epidermis of leaves. Stomata regulate the process of transpiration and gaseous exchange. Each stomata is composed of two bean-shaped cells known as guard cellls. In grasses, the guard cells are dumbbell-shaped.

The outer walls of guard cells (away from the stomatal pore) are thin and the inner walls (towards the stomatal pore) are highly thickened. The guard cells possess chloroplasts and regulate the opening and closing of stomata.

Question 6.
Which of the following is correct?
(a) cells of all living organisms have a nucleus.
(b) Both animal and plant cells have a well-defined cell wall.
(c) In prokaryotes, there are no membrane-bound organelles.
(d) Cells are formed de novo from abiotic materials.
Answer:
(c) In prokaryotes, there are no membrane-bound organelles.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 7.
New cells generate from
(a) bacterial fermentation
(b) regeneration of old cells
(c) pre-existing cells
(d) abiotic materials
Answer:
(c) Pre-existing cells

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which one is single membrane cell organelle?
(a) Endoplasmic reticulum
(b) Mitochondria
(c) Lysosomes
(d) Chloroplast
Answer:
(c) Lysosomes

Question 2.
The main function of lysosome is
(a) sexual reproduction
(b) extracellular digestion
(c) intracellular digestion
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c)

Question 3.
Endoplasmic reticulum is in continuation with
(a) Golgi body
(b) nuclear wall
(c) mitochondria
(d) cell wall
Answer:
(b) nuclear wall

Question 4.
Which of the following is not a function of vacuole in plant cell?
(a) Storage
(b) Waste disposal
(c) Cell elongation and protection
(d) Production of hydrogen peroxide
Answer:
(c) Cell elongation and protection

Question 5.
The ATP synthase of chloroplasts is like that of
(a) peroxisomes
(b) Golgi body
(c) microsomes
(d) mitochondria
Answer:
(d) mitochondria

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 6.
Fat is stored in the plant cell in
(a) lysosome
(b) spherosome
(c) microsome
(d) peroxisome
Answer:
(b) spherosome

Question 7.
F1 -particles comprise of
(a) head and base
(b) base and stalk
(c) head and stalk
(d) head, base, and stalk
Answer:
(a) head and base

Question 8.
Term basal body is associated with the development of
(a) cilia and flagella
(b) cell plate
(c) phragmoplast
(d) kinetochore
Answer:
(a) cilia and flagella

Question 9.
Golgi body receives materials from
(a) lysosome
(b) endoplasmic reticulum
(c) mitochondria
(d) cell membrane
Answer:
(b) endoplasmic reticulum

Question 10.
Quantasomes are found in
(a) mitochondria
(b) chloroplast
(c) lysosome
(d) endoplasmic reticulum
Answer:
(b) chloroplast

Question 11.
The term mitochondria was given by
(a) Benda
(b) Altmann
(c) Palade
(d) de Duve
Answer:
(a) Benda

Question 12.
The prokaryotic cell does not contain
(a) chromosome
(b) mitochondria
(c) plasma membrane
(d) ribosome
Answer:
(b) mitochondria

Question 13.
Organelle important in spindle formation during nuclear division is
(a) Golgi body
(b) chloroplast
(c) centriole
(d) mitochondrion
Answer:
(c) centriole

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 14.
The surface of the endoplasmic reticulum (ER) is covered with
(a) ribosome
(b) DNA
(c) RNA
(d) glucose
Answer:
(a) ribosome

Question 15.
Spindles are formed by
(a) microtubules
(b) golgi body
(c) endoplasmic reticulum
(d) peroxisome
Answer:
(a) microtubules

Question 16.
In plants, vacuole contains
(a) soil
(b) water and dissolved substance
(c) cytoplasm
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(b) water and dissolved substance

Question 17.
Which cell organelle is present in both prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell?
(a) Ribosome
(b) Mitochondria
(c) ER
(d) Nucleus
Answer:
(a) Ribosome

Question 18.
Cilia are
(a) short (5-10 pm) hair-like narrow protoplasmic process
(b) with sweeping or bendular movements
(c) more numerous
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 19.
Chemiosmotic theory of ATP synthesis in the chioroplasts and mitochondria is based on
(a) proton gradient
(b) accumulation of K ions
(c) accumulation of Na ions
(d) membrane potential
Answer:
(a) proton gradient

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 20.
An organism exclusively with 70S type of ribosomes contains one of the following
(a) DNA enclosed within the nuclear membrane
(b) circular naked DNA
(c) double-stranded DNA with protein coat
(d) single-stranded DNA with protein coat
Answer:
(b) circular naked DNA

 

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Students can Download Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the tag to which the attribute frame is associated.
Answer:
<Table>
Frame attribute specifies the border lines around the table. Possible values are void, box, above, below, hsides, Hsides, Lhs, Rhs Eg. <Table Frame = “below”>

Question 2.
The tag used to create combo in HTML is______.
Answer:
<Select>

Question 3.
The option attribute is associated with_____<tag>
Answer:
<Select>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 4.
Consider the following. <FRAMESET Cols= “50 %,*”>
What will be the output of the above HTML statement?
Answer:
It divides browser window with frames of equal width in column wise.

Frame 1Frame 2

Question 5.
Consider the following. <FRAMESET Rows= “50%,*”>
What will be the output of the above HTML statement?
Answer:
It divides browser window into two frames in row wise equally.

Frame 1
Frame 2

Question 6.
<Select> Tag create____in HTML.
Answer:
Combo box

Question 7.
The default align value for a table is_____.
(a) Left
(b) Right
(c) Center
(d) Justify
Answer:
(a) Left

Question 8.
A submit button can be created by_____tag.
(a) <SUBMIT>
(b) <INPUT>
(c) <SELECT>
(d) <ACTION>
Answer:
(b) <INPUT>

Question 9.
_____Tag enclosed the heading cells in a table.
(a) <TABLE>
(b) <TR>
(c) <TH>
(d) <TD>
Answer:
(c) <TH>

Question 10.
_____is an empty tag.
(a) <FRAME>
(b) <FORM>
(c) <FRAMESET
(d) <TABLE>
Answer:
(a) <FRAME>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 11.
Pick the odd one out. Justify your answer
(a) NOFRAME
(b) Body
(c) SRC
(d) HEAD
Answer:
(c) SRC. It is an attribute. All other are tags.

Question 12.
Name the tag which is used as an attribute to another tag?
Answer:
<Center>or<Frame>

Question 13.
The borderlines around a table is specified by_____Attribute.
(a) Frame
(b) cell border
(c) Background
(d) Border
Answer:
(b) Bonder

Question 14.
To change the background colour of a table, which attribute of <table>tag is used for this purpose.
Answer:
BGCOLOR – This attribute specifies the background colour of the table.
<TABLE BORDER=2 BGCOLOR= “Blue”>

Question 15.
Which tag is used to divide the window more than one?
Answer:
<Frameset>

Question 16.
____tag is used to pass information from web viewers to web server.
Answer:
<Form>

Question 17.
_____tag provides a label forthe form control.
Answer:
<Label>

Question 18.
A____has no <body> section.
Answer:
<Frameset> tag

Question 19.
A <frameset> tag no____tag.
Answer:
<Body> tag

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 20.
Name the attribute used to merge two or more rows of a table in an HTML document.
Answer:
Rowspan.

Question 21.
In HTML_____tag is used to create a row in a table
Answer:
<TR>

Question 22.
The space between the border of the cell and its content can be adjusted by an attribute of the <TABLE> tag. Identify this attribute.
Answer:
Cell padding

Question 23.
Give the value of the frame attribute of <TABLE> tag to get the outer border only.
Answer:
box

Question 24.
Baiju wants to place a picture in a table cell. Which attribute of the < TD > tag will be used for this.
Answer:
Back ground.

Question 25.
_____tag forms the definition term in a definition list.
(a) <DD>
(b) <DT>
(c) <DL>
(d) <DR>
Answer:
(b) <DT>

Question 26.
Name the possible values of type attribute of UnOrdered list.
Answer:
tag <UL> can take values square, circle or disc.

Question 27.
To create a list using Uppercase letters use_____?
Answer:
<OLType=”A”>

Question 28.
To create a list using Lower case letters use_____?
Answer:
<OLType=”a”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 29.
To start a list from the count of 3 using______?
Answer:
<OL start=”3”>

Question 30.
Mr. Suresh wants to prepare a list of students with register number. But he wants to start numbering from 5? How can it be done using HTML?
Answer:
Ordered list is used for this <OL start = “5”>

Question 31.
Pick the wrong one from the statements given below:
(A) <OL>and <UL> have Type attribute
(B) Default numbering scheme in <OL> is 1,2, 3…
(C) In Definition List, <DD> tag is used to give definition of terms
(D) Start attribute of ordered list should always be set to 1
Answer:
(D) Start attribute of ordered list should always be set to 1

Question 32.
Which of the following is the correct way to create an email link?
(A) <A href= “abc@xyz”>
(B) <mail href= “abc@xyz”>
(C) <mail> “abc@xyz”>
(D) <A href= “mailto: abc@xyz”>
Answer:
(D) <A href= “mailto: abc@xyz”>

Question 33.
There are two web pages in the class project created by Mathew. The second page should appear in the browser when clicked at a particular text in the first page. What do you call this feature? Name the tag and attribute needed for creating such a feautre.
Answer:
This feature is called link
Tag used is <A> and attribute is HREF

Question 34.
Observe the table with two rows. Which of the following is used with TD tag to merge the cells C and D?

AB
CD

(A) Merge=colspan 2
(B) Rowspan= “2”.
(C) Colspan= “2”
(D) Merge=raw2
Answer:
(C) Colspan= “2”

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 35.
Why do we use <NOFRAME> tag?
Answer:
<NOFRAME> tag is used to give a content when some browser that does not support frameset.

Question 36.
Which of the following tag is used to create a list box in a html Form?
(a) <SUBMIT>
(b) <INPUT>
(c) <SELECT>
(d) <ACTION>
Answer:
(c) <SELECT>

Question 37.
The tag used for creating a drop-down list in HTML is_____.
Answer:
<select> tag

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Manju wants to display 3 web pages on the same screen horizontally. Which HTML statements can be used for this?
Answer:
<Frameset Rows=“33%, *, * ” >
<Frame SRC = Page1. html>
<Frame SRC = Page2. html>
<Frame SRC = Page3. html>
< / Frameset >

Question 2.
Adithya College of Engineering wants to Create their web site, in which the home page is to be designed as a combination of two Vertical panes.

  1. Suggest suitable tags used for this.
  2. Write the HTML statements to get this type of page.

Answer:
1. < Frame set > and < Frame > tags

2. < Frameset cols = “ 50%, * ” >
< Frame SRC = “ Page1. HTML ” >
< Frame SRC = “ Page2. HTML ” >
< / Frameset >

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 3.
‘Kerala Communication channel’ conduct a TV program based on Education policies of Kerala Govt. They want to take the feed back from the viewers through their website.

  1. While creating this site, which type of tag is used to accept multiple line of text from the viewers.
  2. Name any two attributes of this tag.

Answer:

  1. < TEXTAREA>
  2. Cols, rows, name

Question 4.
Distinguish between cellspacing and cellpadding attribute of <Table> tag.
Answer:

  1. Cellspacing: it specifies the space between two table cells.
  2. Cellpadding: It specifies the space between cell border and content.

Question 5.
Match the following

Group AGroup B
<TABLE>HREF
<HTML>DIR
<IMG>BORDER
 <A>SRC
TYPE

Answer:

Group AGroup B
<TABLE>BORDER
<HTML>DIR
<IMG>SRC
 <A>HREF

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 6.
Differentiate <frame> and <frameset> tags.
Answer:
The <frameset> tag defines the frame sections and the <frame> tag specifies the pages to be loaded in each frame
<FRAMESET> tag And <FRAME>tag
Attributes of <FRAMESET>

  • Rows: Used to divide screen in row wise
  • Cols: Used to divide screen in column wise
  • Attributes of <FRAME>
  • SRC: Specifies name of web page to be loaded in Frame
  • Scrolling: Enables the webpage displayed to be scrolled

Eg. <FRAMESETCols= “50%,*”>
<FRAME SRC= “page1.html>
<FRAME SRC= “page2.htmr>
</FRAMESET>

Question 7.
How can you merge cells in a table?
Answer:
By using attributes Colspan or Rowspan

  1. Colspan : It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of columns.
    Eg: <TD Colspan=3> spans the cell over three columns
  2. Rowspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of rows.
    Eg: <TD Rowspan=3> spans the cell over three rows.

Question 8.
Raju created a web page as follows:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 1
But he is unable to view any tabular format in the web page, when it is displayed in the browser. Find the reason for it and correct the same.
Answer:
Without “Border” attribute it never shows tabular form, Border attribute is missing.
<TABLE BORDER=3>

Question 9.
Name the possible values of type attribute of Ordered list.
Answer:
The tag <OL> can take Values as follows

  1. type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,….
  2. type = i for i, ii, iii,….
  3. type = I for I, II, III,…..
  4. type = a for a, b, c,…
  5. type = A for A, B, C,……

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 10.
Predict the output of the following HTML segment.
<OL Type = “1 ” start = “5”>
<Li> Chocolate</Li>
<Li> Milk </Li>
<Li> Coffee</Li>
</OL>
Answer:
5. Chocolate
6. Milk
7. Coffee

Question 11.
Compare the use of Type attribute in Ordered and Unordered list in HTML?
Answer:
1. Unordered List (<UL>): Items are displayed with square, circle or disc in front.
Eg: <UL TYPE=” circle”>

2. Ordered List (<OL>): Items are displayed with the following type values.
Type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,…….
Type = i for i, ii, iii,…..
Type = I for I, ll, III,…..
Type = a for a, b, c,…..
Type = A for A, B, C,…..
Eg: <OL TYPE=”A”>

Question 12.
Differentiate internal linking and external linking with examples.
Answer:

  1. External Linking -: Used to connect two different web pages
    Eg:<A href = “School. html’> School</A>
  2. Internal linking: Internal links are given to a sec¬tion in the same document.
    <A href =“#top”>Goto Top </A>
    <A href = “#bottom>Goto Bottom </A>

Question 13.
While moving the mouse pointer over a web page, the mouse pointer changes its shape to hand icon symbol.

  1. Give reason for this change in mouse pointer.
  2. Name the tag and attributes used for it.

Answer:

  1. It is a hyper link
  2. <A> tag, href attribute.

Question 14.
HTML has facility to provide external and internal hyperlinks.

  1. Which tag is used to include a hyper link?
  2. Explain two attributes needed for creating internal hyperlink.

Answer:

  1. <A>
  2. name, href

Question 15.
Match the following.

EMBEDhref
OLloop
Astart
BGSOUNDhidden

Answer:
EMBED-hidden, OL-start, A-href, BGSOUND- loop

Question 16.
Categorize the following tags into containertags and empty tags,
<A>, <FRAME>, <FRAMESET>, <INPUT>
Answer:

  1. Empty tags:
    <FRAME>& <INPUT>
  2. Container tags:
    <FRAMESET> & <A>

Question 17.
The <FORM> tag is used to accept data and communicate with a server program.

  1. Name any two attributes of FORM tag.
  2. How will you create a “SUBMIT” button and a “RESET” button within the FORM tag?

Answer:

  1. Action, Method
  2. <INPUT Type=“submit”>
    <INPUT Type=“reset”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 18.
Aliya wants to display three webpages (A.htm, B.htm, C.htm) on the same screen horizontally at the ratio 20%, 40%, 40%. Write the HTML code for the same.
Answer:
<FRAMESET ROWS=”20%,40%,40%”>
<FRAME Src= “A.htm”>
<FRAME Src= “B.htm”>
<FRAME Src= “C.htm”>
</FRAMESET >

Question 19.
Distinguish Cellspacing and Cellpadding attributes of<TABLE> tag.
Answer:

  • Cell spacing: Specifies space between table cells
  • Cell padding: Specifies space between cell border and content.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Point out the difference between relative and absolute URL.
Answer:
URL means uniform Resource Locator.
Two type of URL
1. Relative URL: Here we explicitly give the web site address
Eg: <Ahref=http://www.hscap,kerala.gov.in>

2. Absolute URL: Here we implicitly give the web site address. The path is not specified here.
Eg: Consider the web pages index.html and school.html saved in the folder C:\BVM.The file indexs.html contains the following.

<A href-’school.htmr’>. Here we did not specify the full path of the file school.html. But this implicitly points to the file stored in C:\BVM.

Question 2.
Name the tag which is used to play the music in background while the webpage is being viewed.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 2
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 3

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 3.
Differentiate <FRAME>, <FRAMESET> and <NOFRAME>tags.
Answer:

  1. <FRAMESET> tag is used to divide the window more than one pane. It has no body section.
  2. <FRAME>. It specifies the pages within a frameset.
  3. <NOFRAME>. <NOFRAME> tag is used to give a content when some browser that does not support frameset.

Question 4.
In a web page, user needs to enter the address of persons. Name the tag used for this. List and explain any two main attributes of it.
Answer:
<TEXTAREA>. This is used to enter multiple lines in a. Text Box of a web page. Main attributes are:

  • Rows: Specifies the height of text area control, ie. The number of Lines the Text Area should have
  • Cols: Specifies width ie number of characters per line. Name: Gives a variable name to the Text Area control. Eg: <TEXTAREA Name=”Address” Cols=20 Rows=5>

Question 5.
Consider the following table.

BatchBoysGirls
Science2526
Commerce2030

Write the HTML code for the above.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 4
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 5

Question 6.
Name the tag which permits a user to add more than one web page in a single window. List any attributes of it with explanation.
Answer:
<FRAMESET> tag and <FRAME>tag
Attributes of <FRAMESET>

  • Rows: Used to divide screen in rowwise
  • Cols: Used to divide screen in column wise
  • Attributes of <FRAME>
  • SRC: Specifies name of web page to be loaded in Frame
  • NAME: Gives a name for the frame.

Eg. <FRAMESET Rows= “50%,*”>
<FRAME SRC= “page1.htm”>
<FRAME SRC= “page2.htm”>
</FRAMESET>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 7.
In VB, a Programmer can use Option Button, Text Box, Combo box, etc. to accept inputs from the user. Butin HTML<INPUT> tag is used for creating all the above controls. Which attributes of the <INPUT> tag is used for this? List and explain the possible values of it.
Answer:
The ‘type’ attribute of <INPUT> tag is used to create different control. The main values of type attribute is given below.
1. Text: Creates a single line Text Box.
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Text”>

2. Password: creates a password box in which characters are displayed by symbols like asterisk(*)
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Passwords”>

3. Check Box: Creates a check box.
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Check Box”>

4. Radio: Creates option button (Radio Button)
Eg.<INPUT Type= “Radio” Name-‘sex”Value= “M”>Male

5. Reset: Creates re^et button. It is used to clear all the data entered
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Reset”>

6. Submit: Creates a submit Button. When click on it data entered in the form will sent to web server. Eg. <INPUT Type = “Submit”>

Question 8.
Write the HTML code for the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 6
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 7

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 9.
Write the HTML Code for the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 8
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 9
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 10

Question 10.
Name the attributes in HTML, which can present in more than one tag.
Answer:
The attributes are

  1. Border: It can act in <Table> and in <Frameset> Tag.
  2. Bgcolor: It can act in <Table> and in <Body>tag.
  3. Type: It can act in <OL> and in <lnput>tag.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 11.
What are the main attributes of the <Form> tag?
Answer:
1. Method:
It determines the method of submission of form data to the server. Get and Post are the two form submission methods. Post method is used to pass large volume of data. Also post method is more secure as data entered is not visible during submission. The get method is faster and is used to send lesser volume of data and it is not secure.

2. Action:
The URL of the server side program to process the form data is specified by the Action attribute.
Eg: <Form Action=”http://www.scert.com/asp/ process.asp”>

Question 12.
What are the difference between get method and post method ?
Answer:

Post MethodGet Method
•   It is used to pass large volume of data

•   The data is nof visible during submission

•   It is slower.

•   It is secure.

•   It is used to pass lesser volume of data

•   The data is visible during submission

•   It is faster

•   It is not secure

Question 13.
Lena wants to create a web page, to select the dis¬trict name from a combo. By default the combo box contain the district Trichur. Help her to do so.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 11

Question 14.
Ram creates a web page to record the sex of a student. But he has made a mistake that the student can select both male and female choices at a time. What is the reason for the same. Help him to correct the mistake.
Answer:
To record sex of student radio buttons are used. Usually, radio buttons are provided as a group from which exactly one can be selected at a time by giving the same name for both radio buttons. But here Ram did not give same name for both buttons. Therefore the mistake. The correct code is as follows,
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 12

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 15.
Explain the attributes of <Frameset> Tag.
Answer:

  1. Cols: It determines the dimension of vertical frames(Columns) in the frameset page.
    Eg: <FramesetCols=”50%,*”> creates two vertical frames with equal width.
  2. Rows: It determines the dimension of horizontal frames(Rows) in the frameset page.
    Eg: <Frameset Rows=”50%,*”> creates two horizontal frames with equal height.
  3. Border: It specifies the thickness of the border for the frames.
  4. Bordercolor: It specifies the colour for the frame border.

Question 16.
Explain the attributes of <Frame tag>
Answer:

  1. Src: It specifie the URL of the document to be loaded in the frame.
  2. Scrolling: It indicates scroll bar is to be shown in the frame or not, values are yes, no or auto
  3. Noresize: It stops the resizing of the frame, no value is to be assigned.
  4. Margin width and Marginheight: It sets the horizontal and vertical margins, values are in pixels.
  5. Name: It gives a name for the frame.
  6. Target: It specifies the target frame.

Question 17.
Mr. Sonet visited a website that contains two frames. He tries to resize the first frame by mouse. But he failed to do so. What is the reason behind? Explain?
Answer:
This is because the web designer used Noresize attribute of frame tag while he design the page. Noresize attribute stops the resizing of the frame, no value is to be assigned.
Eg: <frame src=”page1 .html” noresize>

Question 18.
We know that an HTML document contains two sections head and body section. While designing a web page as follows what will happen?
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 13
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 14
Answer:
There is no output because a <frameset> tag has no body tag. It is very important. So the correct code is as follows,
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 15

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 19.
Create a web page as follows to display a list contains items.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 16
Answer:
To create a list box set the size property of <Select> tag to more than 1.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 17

Question 20.
In VB there are separate controls to create List Box and Combo Box. But in HTML these controls can be created by using a single tag.

  1. Name the tag used for this? (1)
  2. Which attribute is used for this and how? (2)

Answer:
1. < SELECT >

2. Size attribute
< SELECT Size = 1 > gives combo box
< SELECT Size = 3> gives a list box

Question 21.
Write HTML code for creating the following webpage using tag.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 18
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 19

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 22.
Write the HTML code for creating the following webpage using List tag.

COMPUTER TERMS
CPUCentral Processing Unit
ALUArithmetic and Logic Unit
WWWWorld Wide Web

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 20
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 21

Question 23.
What will be the output of the following?
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 22
Answer:
The output is as follows. E.COMPUTER, F.BIOLOGY.

Question 24.
Find the errors from the following and correct it.

  1. <ULtype=”A”start=5>
  2. <IMG src=”picture.jpg” size=100>
  3. <HTML>
    <HEAD><TITLE></HEAD></TITLE> <BODY>This is a sample web page</BODY>

Answer:

  1. UL has only specified types and has no start attribute
  2. IMG has no size attribute, use height or width attribute
  3. <HTML>
    <HEAD><TITLE></TITLE></HEAD> <BODY>This is a sample web page</BODY> </HTML>.

Question 25.
Your brother requested you to prepare a list of best friends, from your class using HTML.

  1. Which type of list you will prefer?
  2. Write HTML code to create such a list of 4 students.

Answer:
1. Ordered List<OL> Can be used.

2.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 23

Question 26.
Ravi wants to display the name of 6 subjects as a list by using Upper case Roman Numerals. Help him to do so.
Answer:
<OLType= “I”>
<LI>English
<LI> Sanskrit
<LI>Business studies
<LI>Accountancy
<LI>Economics
<LI>Computer Applications
</OL>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 27.
Your class selected you as the group leader of Group V. In your group there are 5 students with Roll No. 20 to 24. Prepare a list using appropriate tag in HTML.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 24

Question 28.
Write HTML code to get the following output.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 25
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 26

Question 29.
Write HTML code to get the following table as output.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 27
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 28
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 29

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 30.
Write the tags to define the following:

  1. Text Box
  2. Submit Button
  3. Reset Button
  4. Radio Button

Answer:

  1. .<inputtype=”text” name=”txtname”>
  2. .<input type=”Submit” value=”Send”>
  3. .<input type=”Reset” value=”Clear”>
  4. .<input type=”Radio” name=”Sex” value= “Male”>Male
    <input type=”Radio” name=”Sex” value=” Female”>Female

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write an HTML code to create a web page with 3 frames as shown below:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 30
Answer:
Step 1: Take a notepad, type the following and save it as main.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 31

Step 2: Take another notepad, type the following and save it as page1.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 32
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 33

Step 3: Take another notepad, type the following and save it as page 2.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 34

step 4: Take another notepad, type the following and save it asframe.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 35

Step 5. Finally run the frame.html file.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 2.
Explain any three attributes of <FORM>tag.
Answer:
1. Action: Here we give the name of program (including the path) stored in the Web server.

2. Method: There are 2 types of methods get and post.

Get methodPost method
1. Faster1. Slower
2. To send small volume of data2. To send large volume of data
3. Less secure3. More secure
4. Data visible during submission4. Data not visible during submission

3. Target: Specifies the target window for displaying the result. Values are given below.

  • _blank-Opens in a new window
  • _self-Opens in the same frame
  • _parent – Opens in the parent frameset
  • _top- Opens in the main browser window
  • name – Opens in the window with the specified name.

Question 3.
Explain the attributes of <Table> tag?

OR

Name any six attributes of <table> tag that determine the general layout of table.
Answer:

  1. Border: It specifies the thickness of the border lines around the table.
  2. Bordercolor: It specifies the colour for border lines
  3. Align: It specifies the table alignment, the values can be left, right or center
  4. Bgcolor: It specifies the back ground colour for the table.
  5. Cellspacing : It specifies the space between two table cells
  6. Cellpadding: It specifies the space between cell border and content
  7. Cols: It specifies the number of columns
  8. Width: It determines the table width
  9. Frame: It specifies the border lines around the table, values are void, border, box, above, below,…

Question 4.
Explain the attributes of <TH> and <TD>?
Answer:

  1. Align: It specifies the horizontal alignment of the content, the values can be left, right, center and justify.
  2. Valign: It specifies the vertical alignment of the content, the values can be top, middle, Bottom, and baseline.
  3. Bgcolor: It specifies the back ground colour for the cell.
  4. Colspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of columns.
    Eg: <TD Colspan=3> spans the cell over three columns
  5. Rowspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of rows.
    Eg: <TD Rowspan=3> spans the cell over three rows.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 5.
Create an HTML page as shown below using lists.
The recipe for preparation

  1. The ingredients
    • 100g flour
    • 10g sugar
    • 1 cup water
    • 2 egg
    • Salt and pepper
  2. The procedure
    A. Mix dry ingredients thoroughly
    B. Pour in wet ingredients
    C. Mix for 10 mts
    D. Bake for 1 hr at 100 degree C temperature

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 36
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 37

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 6.
Create HTML code for the following output.

  1. Flowers
    • Jasmine
    • Rose
    • Lily
  2. Vegetables
    • Beetroot
    • Cabbage
    • Cucumber
  3. Fruits
    i. Apple
    ii. Orange
    iii. Pineapple

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 38
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 39

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Students can Download Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Both apical and intercalary meristems are meristems
(a) primary
(b) secondary
(c) lateral
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) primary

Question 2.
Sclerieds present in
(a) fruit wall of nuts
(b) pulp of guava
(c) seed coat of legumes
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 3.
Which of the following condition of xylem is present in both monocot and dicot stems
(a) exarch
(b) endarch
(c) polyarch
(d) mesarch
Answer:
(b) endarch

Question 4.
Bark does not include
(a) secondary xylem
(b) secondary phloem
(c) periderm
(d) primary phloem
Answer:
(a) secondary xylem

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 5.
…………… is the living mechanical tissue
(a) collenchyma
(b) parenchyma
(c) sclerenchyma
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) collenchyma

Question 6.
What are the cells that make the leaves curl in plants during water stress?
Answer:
Bulliform cells/motor cells

Question 7.
What part of the plant would show the following:
(a) Radial vascular bundle
(b) Polyarch xylem
(c) Well developed pith
Answer:
(a) Radial vascular bundle

Question 8.
Apical meristem for elongation of Stem, Lateral meristem for ………..
Answer:
Increase in thickness.

Question 9.
While analysing the anatomy of a given slide, phloem, cambium & xylem are present. Identify the material.
Answer:
Dicot stem.

Question 10.
Tissues are specialised to perform mechanical function have thickening at corners, living and cellulosic. Name it.
Answer:
Collenchyma

Question 11.
A cross-section of plant materials show the following features under microscope there are many vascular bundles scattered in the parenchymatous tissue, xylem is endarch. What kind of plant part shows the above anatomy.
Answer:
Monocot stem

Question 12.
Name tissue which provides mechanical strength to the plant’s organs.
Answer:
Sclerenchyma and xylem

Question 13.
What does the fascicular cambium gives rise to?
Answer:
Secondary vascular tissues and medullary rays

Question 14.
From where do the secondary cambium appear?
Answer:
From permanent tissues

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 15.
Which type of meristems can be classified on the basis of positions in the plant body.
Answer:
Apical, intercalary and lateral

Question 16.
Find the odd one and give reason:
Phellem, Phellogen, Phloem, Phelloderm
Answer:
Phloem. The other components are part of periderm

Question 17.
Fill in the blanks:
Stem: Endarch:: Root: ……….
interfascicular cambium: secondary xylem:: cork cambium: …………
Answer:
Exarch, phelloderm

Question 18.
Activity of cambium is different in two seasons and xylem vessels formed have narrow and wider lumens. Give the type of wood formed during the different seasons.
Answer:
Springwood and autumn wood.

Question 19.
What use are phloem fibres put to
Answer:
Phloem fibers of plants like jute are used for making ropes.

Question 20.
Identify the plant group from the data given below.
(a) Habit-Tree
(b) Xylem vessels present
(c) Absence of companion cells in phloem
(d) No fruits
Answer:
Gymnosperm

Question 21.
Ramu observed the growth of a plant in his garden. He realised that the plant grow both in length and width. Name the tissue responsible for the growth of the plant.
Answer:
Meristems

Question 22.
A cross-section of plant materials show the following anatomical features under microscope.

  1. Vascular bundles are radially arranged
  2. Four xylem strands with exarch condition of the protoxylem. To which organ should it be assigned?

Answer:
Dicot root

Question 23.
The transverse section of a plant material shows the following anatomical features.

  1. vascular bundles are conjoint, scattered and surrounded by a sclerenchymatous bundle sheath.
  2. Phloem parenchyma is absent. What will you identify as?

Answer:
The plant is a monocotyledon.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 24.
The cross-section of a plant material showed the following features when viewed under the microscope.

  1. The vascular bundles were radially arranged.
  2. Four xylem strands with exarch condition of protoxylem.

To which organ should it be assigned?
Answer:
Dicot root

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
During the secondary thickening of a dicot stem, from the outer cotical region, a meristematic tissue is developed. Name this tissue and write the function of it.
Answer:
Phellogen/cork cambium – It produces phellum towards the outer sides & phelloderm towards the inner side. These 3 layers are known as periderm

Question 2.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter is an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img1
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img2

Question 3.
Differentiate the following characters of dicot stem and monocot stem.
Differentiated cortex, Protoxylem lacuna present, open bundle, bundle sheath, starch sheath, sclerenchymatous hypodermis, scattered bundles, V.Bs. arranged in a ring, closed bundles, phloem parenchyma absent, presence of pith, collenchymatous hypodermis.
Answer:

Dicot stemMonocot stem
Differentiated cortex

Open bundle

Starch sheath

V.Bs arranged in ring

Presence of pith

collenchymatous

hypoderms

Protoxylem lacuna present

Bundle sheath

Closed bundle

Phloem parenchyma absent

Sclerenchymatous hypoderms

Question 4.
Xylem is the complex tissue that transports water in plants.

  1. Name the main components of xylem.
  2. Which of these is most likely suitable for conducting water?

Answer:

  1. Xylem parenchyma, vessels, tracheid, xylem fibers.
  2. Vessels

Question 5.
Examine the anatomy of two plants

  1. Xylem vessels and tracheids are seen
  2. Xylem vessels absent and tracheids present

Answer:

  1. Angiosperm
  2. Gymnosperm

Question 6.
Identify the figure ‘A’ and ‘B’ and differentiate between ‘A’ and ‘B’.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img3
Answer:

AB
DicotstemDicot root
Vascular bundles are arranged in a ring, limited no., conjoint, endarch & openVascular bundles are radial, exarch

Question 7.
Secondary growth occurs in dicots and no such growth in monocots. Justify.
Answer:
In dicots, cambium is present in their vascular bundle. In monocot, cambium is absent in the vascular bundles. So secondary growth occurs in dicotyledons and not in monocotyledons.

Question 8.
Phloem is called the complex tissue while parenchyma is a simple tissue. Make the differences
Answer:
Phloem is made up of more than one type of cells namely, sieve tube, companion cell, phloem parenchyma & phloem fiber. Parenchyma consists of same types of cells.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 9.
When the cross-section of a stem was examined, a student could notice collenchymatous hypodermis, Limited number of open vascular bundles, cortex, endodermis, and pith.

  1. Identify the material.
  2. Draw the diagram of the material showing these parts and label.

Answer:
1. Dicot stem
2.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img4

Question 10.
Observe the diagrams and identify the tissue types.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img5
Answer:
a. Collenchyma
b. Sclerenchyma

Question 11.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter in an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img6
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img7

Question 12.
While doing anatomy practical, students observe ten following characters:

  • Undifferentiated ground tissue.
  • Numerous vascular bundles and are scattered.
  • Sclerenchymatous hypodermis
  • Presence of bundle sheath

1. Identify the material.
2. Write any one example of a plant having such characters.
Answer:

  1. Monocot stem.
  2. Grass/Bamboo

Question 13.
What is the function of phloem parenchyma?
Answer:
The phloem parenchyma stores food material and other substances like resins, latex, and mucilage.

Question14.
How do you correlate the activity of cambium with changing seasons?
Answer:
During winter season the cambium stops its activity. In spring season cambium becomes more active and produce large quantity of secondary tissue. The secondary xylem produced during spring season is called springwood. During autumn season and summer season the cambium becomes less active and produces small quantity of secondary tissue. The secondary xylem produced during this period is called autumn wood.

Question 15.
Mention the characteristic features of sieve-tube members.
Answer:
Sieve tubes are cylindrical have endplates called sieve plates. They are dead elements of phloem.

Question 16.
It is difficult to open and close wooden doors and windows during the rainy season. What is the reason?
Answer:
Imbibition It is the absorption of water by water-loving particles without forming a solution

Question 17.
Heartwood is resistant to microorganisms. Justify the statement.
Answer:
Contains alkalloids , tannins & resins

Question 18.
The microscopic observation is given below.

  1. Identify A and B.
  2. Write any two distinguishing characters of the above diagram.

Answer:

  1. A dicot stem B monocot stem
  2. In dicot stem vascular budles open, limited no.&arranged in the form of a ring. In monocot stem, vascular bundles closed, numerous & scattered

Question 19.
Simple tissues that perform mechanical support in plants are usually dead tissues’
Name the living simple tissue that provides mechanical support to plant organs. In which category of plants (dicots/monocots) do they found?
Answer:
Sclerenchyma tissues Monocots

Question 20.
What is present on the surface of the leaves which helps the plant prevent loss of water but is absent in roots?
Answer:
The cuticle is the waxy substance prevents the excessive water loss.

Question 21.
What is the epidermal cell modification in plants which prevents water loss?
Answer:
The presence of bulliform cells in the leaves of monocot plants, which helps in rolling and unrolling of lamina and prevents water loss.

Question 22.
Arrange the following in the sequence you would find them in a plant starting from the periphery – phellem. phellogen. phelloderm.
Answer:
phellem, phellogen, phelloderm.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 23.
A transverse section of the trunk of a tree shows concentric rings which are known as growth rings. How are these rings formed? What is the significance of these rings?
Answer:
It is formed due to the activity of vascular ambium. The growth ring comprises springwood and autumn wood that is formed in spring season and winter season respectively. These are used to determine the age of tree by counting the number of concentric rings.

Question 24.
While eating peach or pear it is usually seen that some stone-like structures get entangled in the teeth, what are these stone-like structures called?
Answer:
USB Non-elongated sclerenchyma(sclereids)

Question 25.
When your teacher asked to collect different types of seeds. One of the students collected some seeds from a tree. These seeds have no covering or naked.

  1. In which group of plants does this tree belong?
  2. Which portion of the plant develops into the seed?

Answer:

  1. Gymnosperms
  2. Ovule

Question 26.
We cannot find the woody trunk in monocot plants. Why?
Answer:
Monocots do not possess cambium Hence, the secondary tissues are not formed.

Question 27.
Identify the following materials under microscope.

  1. Xylem polyarch, Round vessels, homogenous cortex with xylem & phloem in radial manner.
  2. Endarch xylem, conjoint bundle, surrounded by bundle sheath, palisade and spongy tissues distinguished and kidney-shaped guard cells

Answer:

  1. Monocot root
  2. Dicot leaf

Question 28.
The product of photosynthesis is transported from the leaves to various parts of the plants and stored in some cells before being utilised. What are the cells/ tissues that store them?
Answer:
parenchyma tissue

Question 29.
Name the kind of vascular bundle in Fig. a and b.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img19
Answer:
a. Closed bundle
b. Open bundle

Question 30.
Heartwood is resistant to micro-organisms. Justify the statement.
Answer:
The deposition of substances like Tannin, resin, oil, gum, aromatic substances and essential oil in the central part of wood helps to resist the attack of microorganisms.

Question 31.
Cambial ring is responsible for the formation of secondary vascular tissues both in Dicot stem and Dicot root. Differentiate the origin of cambial ring in Dicot stem and Dicot root.
Answer:
1. In Dicot stem, the conjuctive tissues in between the vascular bundles become meristematic and form. interfascicular cambium, it joins with intrafascicular cambium to form a cambial ring.

2. In Dicot root, the tissue just below phloem and part of pericycle tissue above the protoxylem join together to form a wavy ring. Later it becomes circular.

Question 32.
Give reason

  1. Grittiness nature of sapota fruit pulp
  2. Increase thickness of stem intake and not in coconut

Answer:

  1. Due to the presence of nonelogated sclerenchyma tissues (sclereids)
  2. In Teak, cambium is present (dicot plant) In coconut, cambium is absent because it is a monocot plant.
    Cambial activity causes an increase in thickness

Question 33.
Match the following.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img8
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img9

Question 34.
You may have observed droplets of water at the tip of leaves of grasses during early morning. Your sister told it is a dewdrop.
As a science student do you agree with her? Explain. Compare this process with transpiration.
Answer:
No.

  1. The droplets of water are found in the tip of grass leaves. This is called Guttation. It occurs in early morning.
  2. Water drops come out from Hydathode seen in the vien endings of leaf.
  3. Transpiration is the loss of water in the form of water vapour from stomata of leaves.

Question 35.
How can we correlate the activity of cambium with changing season?
Answer:
In spring season the activity of cambium is more and produces large no. of xylem vessels with wide lumen. But in Autumn season the activity of cambium is less and produces fewer no.of xylem vessels with narrow lumen.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 36.
Classify the following characters under dicot and monocot stem?
Bundle sheath is present, open bundle, bundle cap is present, closed bundle, arranged in a broken ring, scattered bundle, collenchymatous hypodermis, sclerenchymatous hypodermis.
Answer:

Dicot stemMonocot stem
Open bundle

Bundle cap is present

Arranged in a broken ring

collenchymatous

Hypodermis

Bundle sheath is present

Closed bundle

Scattered bundle

Sclerenchymatous

Hypodermis

Question 37.
Distinguish between cork cambium and vascular cambium.
Answer:
1. Cork cambium is the meristematic layer that cut of the tissues outside called phellem and inside phelloderm.

2. Vascular cambium is the meristematic layer that cut of the tissues outside called secondary phloem and inside secondary xylem.

Question 38.
Identify the following diagram and write its function.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img10
Answer:
Hydathode. It is the pore found in the vein ending of the grass leaf through which water loss occurs in the form of droplets.

Question 39.
Which one out of the root or stem shows endarch arrangement of xylem? What is meant by endarch arrangement?
Answer:
Stem, In edarch xylem protoxylem, is present towards the centre (pith) and metaxylem is faced towards outside.

Question 40.
Observe the diagram and identify the tissue types. Justify your answer.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img11
Answer:

  • The first figure is the Sclerenchymatus tissue.
  • The second figure is the collenchymatous tissue.
  • In sclerenchyma tissue, the cell walls are lignified and dead.
  • In collenchymatous tissue, the cell walls are thick and living.

Question 41.
What are bulliform cells? Mention its significance
Answer:
These are the specialised cells found in the epidermis of monocot leaf. They are otherwise called as motor cells.
It helps in the rolling and unrollong of lamina

Question 42.
Where are the companion cells located in the flowering plants? What are their functions?
Answer:
Companion cells are located in the phloem cells of vascular tissue. They support the sieve tubes.

Question 43.
What category of permanent plant cell is a companion cell?
Answer:
Companion cells are specialised thin-walled parenchymatous cells found to be associated with sieve tubes.

Question 44.
Sieve tubes in angiosperms are associated with specialised parenchyma cells. Name those cells. How do they help sieve-tube members?
Answer:
Companion cells, help in physiological working of sieve-tube members.

Question 45.

  1. Name the various components of xylem.
  2. Which of them does not have a nucleus?

Answer:

  1. Tracheids, vessels, xylem parenchyma, and xylem fibers.
  2. Tracheids, vessels, and xylem fibers

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 46.
How are exarch and endarch conditions different anatomically in stem and root?
Answer:
1. The anatomical condition is endarch in dicot as well as monocot stem.

2. In endarch condition protoxylem lie towards inner side of vascular budle However, in anatomy of root.the condition is exarch.i.e protoxylem is towards outer side and metaxylem is towards centre.

Question 47.
Cork cambium forms tissues that form the cork. Do you agree with this statement? Give reasons.
Answer:
Cork cambium develops in cortex region during secondary growth in stem. Cork cambium cut off cork (phellum) towards the outside and secondary cortex or phellodem towards the inner-side.

Question 48.
If one debarks a tree, what parts of the plant is being removed?
Answer:
Phloem is removed and food translocation becomes difficult.

Question 49.
What is periderm? How does periderm formation take place in the dicot stems?
Answer:
Phellogen, phellem, and phelloderm are together known as periderm. Due to secondary growth of the stem, the outer cortical and epidermis layer broken and replaced by another meristematic issue called phellogen. Phellogen or cork cambium cuts off cells on both sides the outer cells are called cork or phellem and the inner cells are phelloderm or secondary cortex.

Question 50.
Some anatomical details of material are given below vascular bumdles are conjoint and open, medullary rays are present, hypodermis collenchymatous, cortex heterogenous

  1. Identify the material
  2. Name the tissue given above from which interfascicular cambium develops during secondary growth.

Answer:

  1. Dicot stem
  2. Medullary ray

Question 51.
Three type of tissues formed during secondary growth together have protective functions.

  1. Name the three types
  2. Name the opening found in outer part of mature woody dicot stem and give its function

Answer:

  1. phellem, phellogen, and phelloderm
  2. lenticel, gaseous exchange

Question 52.

  1. Distinguish between heartwood and sapwood.
  2. Heartwood is durable why?

Answer:
1. Distinguish between heartwood and sapwood
Heartwood

  • found in the central part
  • nonfunctional
  • dark coloured

Sapwood

  • found in peripheral part
  • functional
  • light coloured

2. Heartwood is resistant to microbial attack and it is filled with resin, gum, essential oil, aromatic oil, and tannins. Hence heartwood is durable.

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A portion of the transverse section of maize stem is shown in the diagram.
Label a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h and i.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img12
Answer:

  1. a – Cuticle
  2. b – Epidermis
  3. c – Sclerenchymatous hypodermis
  4. d – Sclerenchymatous sheath
  5. e – Parentchymatous sheath
  6. f – Phloem
  7. g – Metaxylem
  8. h – Protoxylem
  9. i – Water cavity.

Question 2.
Differentiate the following

  1. Bark & Periderm
  2. Heartwood &Sapwood
  3. Endarch & Exarch

Answer:
1. Bark – It is the tissue outside vascular cambium.
Periderm – It is the outer protective tissue It includes phellem, phellogen, and phelloderm.

2. Heartwood – It is the dark coloured, nonfunctional central part of wood resistant to the attack of microorganisms.
Sap wood – It is the light coloured, functional and peripheral part of wood.

3. Endarch – It is the arrangement of xylem in which protoxylem facing towards cente and metaxylem towards the periphery, eg. stem.
Exarch – It is the arrangement of xylem in which Metaxylem facing towards centre and protoxylem towards periphery.eg: Root.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
Match column A with B and C.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img13
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img14

Question 4.
Match the Following.

AB
NostocProtonema
Gonyaulaxrespiratory root
Chlorellared tide
CycasSpace travelers
Rhizophoraheterocyst
FunariaCoralloid root

Answer:

AB
Nostocheterocyst
Gonyaulaxred tide
ChlorellaSpace travelers
CycasCoral loid root
RhizophoraRespiratory root
FunariaProtonema

Question 5.
The following are the characters of Dicot stem and Monocot stem. Identify the character and write in appropriate column.

  1. collenchymatous hypodermis
  2. Sclerenchymatous hypodermis
  3. Open bundle
  4. Closed bundle
  5. Bundle cap present
  6. Bundle sheath present
  7. Xylem polygonal
  8. Xylem circular
Dicot stemMonocot stem

Answer:

DICOTSTEMMONOCOT STEM
ab
cd
ef
gh

Question 6.
Plant growth is indeterminate in most plants it can go on indefinitely at the tips of roots and shoots. Special types of tissues are located at these regions

  1. Name those tissues
  2. Classify these tissues based on the position and origin.

Answer:

  1. Meristematic tissues
  2. Based on the position they are classified into three types,
    • apical meristem
    • intercalary meristem and
    • lateral meristem

Based on the origin, they are classified into 2.

  1. primary meristem and
  2. Secondary Meristem

Question 7.
1. Choose from among the following key terms and
complete the chart given below.
conjoint, closed, exarch open, …………. large, ……………. small endarch, radial ……….. few in a ring, ……….. many xylem and phloem bundles
few.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img15
2. Comment on the utility of this chart.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img16

Question 8.
The following schematic representation shows the classification of complex tissues. Complete it.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img17
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img18

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants NCERT Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the three basic tissue systems in the flowering plants. Give the tissue names under each system.
Answer:
On the basis of their structure and location, there are three types of tissue systems:

  1. Epidermal Tissue System. Epidermis, Stomata.
  2. Ground or Fundamental Tissue System Parenchyma, Sclerenchyma and Collenchyma.
  3. Vascular or conducting Tissue System. Phloem and Xylem.

Question 2.
The transverse section of a plant material shows the following anatomical features

  1. the vascular bundles are conjoint, scattered and surrounded by a sclerenchymatous bundle sheath.
  2. phloem parenchyma is absent. What will you identify as?

Answer:
As is clear from above TS of monocot stem vascular bundles are scattered in monocot stems and phloem parenchyma is absent.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
Why are xylem and phloem called complex tissues?
Answer:
Xylem and phloem are composed of several types of cells and they work as a unit. Hence they are called complex tissues.

Question 4.
What is the stomatal apparatus? Explain the structure of stomata with a labelled diagram.
Answer:
Stomata are structures present in the epidermis of leaves. Stomata regulate the process of transpiration and gaseous exchange. Each stomata is composed of two bean-shaped cells known as guard cells. In grasses, the guard cells are dumbbell-shaped.

The outer walls of guard cells (away from the stomatal pore) are thin and the inner walls (towards the stomatal pore) are highly thickened. The guard cells possess chloroplasts and regulate the opening and closing of stomata.

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Interfascicular cambium is a
(a) primary meristematic tissue
(b) primordial meristem
(c) type of proto deny
(d) secondary meristematic tissue
Answer:
(d) secondary meristematic tissue

Question 2.
In an annual ring, the light coloured part is known as
(a) earlywood
(b) late wood
(c) heartwood
(d) sapwood
Answer:
(a) earlywood

Question 3.
The layer of cells outside the phloem meant for giving rise to the root branches is called
(a) cambium
(b) cork
(c) endodermis
(d) pericycle
Answer:
(d) pericycle

Question 4.
Cork cambium of dicot originates from
(a) epiblema
(b) pericycle
(c) the cambium of vascular bundles
(d) endodermis
Answer:
(b) pericycle

Question 5.
Alburnum is otherwise known as
(a) periderm
(b) sapwood
(c) heartwood
(d) cork
Answer:
(b) sapwood

Question 6.
Duramen is present in
(a) inner region of secondary wood
(b) part of sapwood
(c) outer region of secondary wood
(d) region of pericycle
Answer:
(a) inner region of secondary wood

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 7.
Which one of the following is the correct sequence of tissues present in dicot stem during secondary growth
(a) Phellogen, cork, primary cortex, secondary cortex
(b) Cork, primary cortex, secondary cortex, phellogen
(c) Primary cortex, secondary cortex, phellogen, cork
(d) Secondary Cortex, phellogen, cork .primary cortex
Answer:
(d) Secondary Cortex, phellogen, cork .primary cortex

Question 8.
The meristem responsible for extra stelar secondary growth in dicot stem is
(a) interfascicular cambium
(b) intrafascicular cambium
(c) intercalary meristem
(d) phellogen
Answer:
(d) phellogen

Question 9.
Tracheids
(a) are the dominant cell types of xylem in angiosperms
(b) are primarily found in mosses and liverworts
(c) are responsible for water conduction and support in many land plants.
(d) first appeared during Palaeozoic era
Answer:
(c) are responsible for water conduction and support in many land plants.

Question 10.
In the following, how the sapwood is converted into heartwood?
(a) By degeneration of protoplast of living cells
(b) Tyloses formation
(c) By deposition of resins, oils, gums, etc
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 11.
As secondary growth proceeds in a dicot stem, the thickness of
(a) sapwood increases
(b) heartwood increases
(c) both sapwood and heartwood increase
(d) both sapwood and heartwood remains the same
Answer:
(c) both sapwood and heartwood increase

Question 12.
Which is not a characteristic of plant cell walls?
(a) Found only in the sporophyte phase of life cycle
(b) Among other compounds contains compounds built of simple sugars
(c) May contain enzymes that are biologically active
(d) Often contain strengthening polymers
Answer:
(a) Found only in the sporophyte phase of life cycle

Question 13.
Identify the correct order of the components with reference to their arrangement from outer side to inner side in a woody dicot stern.

  1. Secondary cortex
  2. Autumn wood
  3. Secondary phloem
  4. Phellem

(a) 2,3, 1,4
(b) 3,4,2,1
(c) 4, 1,3,2
(d) 1,2,4,3
Answer:
(c) 4, 1,3,2

Question 14.
Removal of ring wood of tissue outside the vascular cambium from the tree trunk kills it because
(a) water cannot move up
(b) food does not travel down and root become starved
(c) shoot become starved
(d) annual rings are not produced
Answer:
(b) food does not travel down and root become starved

Question 15.
Which tissue gives rise to secondary growth?
(a) Apical meristem
(b) Adventitious roots
(c) Germinating seed
(d) Vascular cambium
Answer:
(d) Vascular cambium

Question 16.
Growth rings are formed due to activity of
(a) extrastelar cambium
(b) intrastelar cambium
(c) interstelar cambium
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c)

Question 17.
A nail is driven into the trunk of a 30 years old tree at a point l in above the soil level. The tree grows in height at the rate of 0.5m a year. After three years, the nail will be
(a) 1m above the soil
(b) 1.5 m above the soil
(c) 2 in above the soil
(d) 2.5 m above the soil
Answer:
(a) 1m above the soil

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 18.
In which of the following, there is no differentiation of bark, sapwood, and heartwood?
(a) Ashok
(b) Neem
(c) Mango
(d) Datepalm
Answer:
(d) Datepalm

Question 19.
A tree grows at a rate of 0.5 m per year. What will be the height of the board fixed at 1.5 m above the base five years ago?
(a) 4.0 m
(b) 3.5 m
(c) 1.5 m
(d) 4.5 m
Answer:
(c) 1.5 m

Question 20.
Secondary phloem remains functional generally
(a) for one year
(b) for less than one year
(c) for many years
(d) as long as the plant is alive
Answer:
(d) as long as the plant is alive

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Students can Download Chapter 4 Biomolecules Questions and Answers, Plus One zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Plus One Biomolecules One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Many elements are found in living organisms either free or in the form of compounds. One of the following is not, found in living organisms.
(a) Silicon
(b) Magnesium
(c) Iron
(d) Sodium
Answer:
(a) Silicon

Question 2.
Aminoacids, as the name suggests, have both an amino group and a carboxyl group in their structure. In addition, all naturally occurring amino acids (those which are found in proteins) are called L-aminoacids. From this, can you guess from which compound can the simplest amino acid be made?
(a) Formic acid
(b) Methane
(c) Phenol
(d) Glycine
Answer:
(b) Methane

Question 3.
When we homogenise any tissue in an acid the acid soluble pool represents
(a) Cytoplasm
(b) Cell membrane
(c) Nucleus
(d) Mitochondria
Answer:
(a) Cytoplasm

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Many organic substances are negatively charged e.g., acetic acid, while others are positively charged e.g., ammonium ion. An amino acid under certain conditions would have both positive and negative charges simultaneously in the same molecule. Such a form of amino acid is called
(a) Positively charged form
(b) Negatively charged form
(c) Neutral form
(d) Zwitter ionic form
Answer:
(d) Zwitter ionic form

Question 5.
Sugars are technically balled carbohydrates, referring to the fact that their formulae are only multiple of C(H2O). Hexoses, therefore, have six carbons, twelve hydrogens and six oxygen atoms. Glucose is a hexose.
Choose from among the following another hexose.
(a) Fructose
(b) Erythrose
(c) Ribulose
(d) Ribose
Answer:
(a) Fructose

Question 6.
Fill the gap:
Inhibition of succinic dehydrogenase by Malonate is an example for _____________
Answer:
Competitive Inhibition

Question 7.
Name the phospholipid found in cell membrane.
Answer:
Lecithin

Question 8.
The metabolic pathway from glucose to lactic acid which occurs in 10 metabolic steps is called ________________
Answer:
Glycolysis

Question 9.
Energy currency in living systems is _______________
Answer:
Adenosine triphosphate (ATP)

Question 10.
Find the off one out.
Rubber, Amino Acids, Drugs, Pigments
Answer:
Amino acids: Amino acids are primary metabolites. All others are secondary metabolites.

Question 11.
Arrange the following Carbo-hydrates in the order of increasing complexity of chemical structure.
Glucose, Oligosaccharides, Lactose, Starch.
Answer:
Glucose → Lactose → Oligosaccharides → Starch

Question 12.
One full turn of the DNA double helix would involve.
(a) 8 steps
(b) 10 steps
(c) 20 steps
(d) 12 steps
Answer:
(b) 10 steps

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 13.
Match the column A with B and C.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 1
Answer:

  • Glucose – Glycoside – Carbohydrate
  • Aminoacids – Peptide – Protein
  • Nucleotide – Phosphor diester – Nucleic acid

Question 14.
A short length of DNA double helix contains 60 Adenine nucleotides and 40 cytosine nucleotides. What will be the total number of nucleotides in it? (60, 120, 80, 200)
Answer:
200

Question 15.
Add suitable word in the gap.

  1. A protein molecule is a polymers of _____________
  2. Nucleic acids are polymers of _____________
  3. DNA has _________ instead of uracil.
  4. Single stranded structure is found in ___________

Answer:

  1. Aminoacids
  2. Nucleotides
  3. Thymine
  4. RNA

Question 16.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 2
The structure of amino acids in solutions of different PH are given above. Identify the structure ‘B’.
Answer:
Zwitterionic form

Question 17.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 3
Name the enzyme catalyse this reaction.
Answer:
Carbonic anhydrase

Plus One Biomolecules Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Observe the table and fill the blanks from the brackets.
(Collagen, Cholesterol, chitin, Lecithin)
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 4
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 5

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Building blocks of proteins are amino acids and that of polysaccharides are monosaccharides. Many polysaccharides are called homopolymers but all proteins are known as heteropolymers.

  1. Do you agree with the above statement? Give reason.
  2. Give one example for a homopolymer.

Answer:

  1. Yes. Many polysaccharides are made up of only one type of monosaccharide. They are known as homopolymers. But all protein contain different type of amino acids. So they all are heteropolymers.
  2. Cellulose. Cellulose is made up of only one type of monosaccharide ie. glucose.

Question 3.
Classify the following as polypeptide and polysaccharide.
(Insulin, Glycogen, Chitin, Paper)
Answer:

PolypeptidePolysaccharide
InsulinGlycogen
Chitin
Paper

Question 4.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 6

  1. Observe the graph and comment.
  2. List out the factors which influence enzyme activity.

Answer:

  1. Each enzyme shows its highest activity at a particular temperature called the optimum temperature. Activity declines both below and above the optimum value.
  2. Temperature, pH, change in substrate concentration, binding of specific chemicals that regulate enzyme activity.

Question 5.
Write the general names of the following.

  1. Enzymes catalyzing the linking together of two compounds.
  2. Enzymes that catalyze removed of groups from substrates by mechanism other than hydrolysis leaving double bonds.

Answer:

  1. Ligases
  2. Lyases

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Find out the differences between DNA and RNA and fill the table given below.

DNARNA
?Ribonucleotides
Deoxyribosugar?
?Single stranded
ACTS Present?

Answer:

DNARNA
DeoxyribonucleotidesRibonucleotides
DeoxyribosugarRibose sugar
Double strandedSingle stranded
ACTG PresentACUG Present

Question 7.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 7
Two polymers are given. In this chain how are monomers linked ?
Answer:
a. Glycosidicbond
b. Peptide bond

Question 8.
The following graph shows the relationship between subtrate concentration and rate of enzymatic reaction.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 8

  1. What is the effect of subtrate concentration on rate of reaction ?
  2. Identify ‘A’.

Answer:
1. With the increase in substrate concentration, the velocity of the enzymatic reaction rise at first. The reaction ultimately reaches a maximum velocity V(max) which is not exceeded by any further rise in concentration of the substrate.

This is because the enzyme molecules are fewer than the substrate molecule and after saturation of these molecules, there are no free enzyme molecules to bind with the additional substrate molecule.

2. V(max)

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 9.
Identify the class of enzyme which catalyse the following reaction.

  1. S reduced + S’ oxidised ? S oxidised + S’ reduced
  2. S – G + S’→ S + S’ – G
    X Y
    I I
  3. C – C → X-Y+C
  4. C-O, C-S, C-N bonds

Answer:

  1. Oxidoreductase
  2. Transferase
  3. Lyases
  4. Ligases

Question 10.
A portion of DNA double helix is given below. Copy the diagram and make correction if any.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 9
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 10

Question 11.
Adenine, Guanine, thymine, Cytosine, Uracil, are the nitrogen bases present in the living organisms. Write their nucleosides and nucleotides.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 11

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 12.

  1. Prepare a graph showing the action of temperature on enzyme activity.
  2. What is optimum temperature.

Answer:
1.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 12

2. Each enzyme shows its highest activity at a particular temperature called optimum temperature.

Question 13.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 13

  1. Identify the given graph
  2. If we add more substrate after reaching Vmax, What will be the effect in the reaction rate?

Answer:

  1. Effect of change in concentration of substrate on enzyme activity.
  2. There is no further increase in the velocity of reaction because there are no free enzyme molecules to bind with the additional substrate molecule.

Question 14.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 14
The table shows the percentage composition of different elements of a living matter and a non-living matter represented as X and Y. Identify X and Y.
Answer:

  1. X – Non living matter (Earth’s crust)
  2. Y – Living matter (human body)

Question 15.
Fatty acids could be saturated or unsaturated. Give an account on it.
Answer:
1. Fatty acids are saturated if they do not have any double bond between the carbons of the molecular chain.
eg: Palmitic acid.

2. Unsaturated fatty acids have one or more double bond between carbon of the molecular chain,
eg: linoleic acid.

Question 16.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 15
Identify the structure.
Answer:
Cholesterol

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 17.
General Formula of amino acid is given below.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 16
(a) Prepare the amino acids – Glycine and Serine using this formula.
(b) State the influence of pH in the nature of amino acid.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 17

(b) Amino acids are of basic amino acids, acidic amino acids, Neutral amino acids and aromatic amino acids. Hence in solutions of different pH, the structure of amino acids changes.

Question 18.
Chemical structure of an Amino acid is given.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 18
(a) Prepare its Zwitter ionic form.
(b) What happens to the Zwitter ion if it is placed in acidic medium?
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 19

(b) In acidic medium it gains H and become positive charged
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 20

Question 19.
Write the missing word.

  1. Amino acid: Protein, Nucleotide: __________
  2. Glucose: Monosaccharide, Starch: __________
  3. Adenine: Thymine, Guanine: ________
  4. Animals: Glycogen, Plants: _________

Answer:

  1. Nucleic acid
  2. Polysaccharide
  3. Cytosine
  4. Starch

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 20.
(a) Identify the structure of protein A and B.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 21
(b) Write an example for a protein with a quaternary structure.
Answer:
(a) A) Secondary structure
B) Tertiary structure

(b) Hemoglobin

Question 21.
Proteins carry out many functions in living organisms. List them.
Answer:

  1. Some protein functions as enzymes.
  2. Some protein functions as Hormones.
  3. Some protein fight infectious organisms.
  4. Some protein transport nutrients across the cell membrane.

Question 22.
Give an example forthe following.

  1. Phospholipids
  2. Saturated fatty acid
  3. Nucleoside
  4. Nucleotide

Answer:

  1. Lecithin
  2. Palmitic acid
  3. Adenosine
  4. Adenylic acid

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 23.
B-DNA is the most common DNA. Write the salient features of this DNA.
Answer:
The length of one full turn of a B-DNA molecule is 34A0. The distance between two adjacent nucleotides in a chain is 3.4A0. Thus there are 10 pairs of nucleotides in one full turn of DNA molecule.

Question 24.
Identify the structure.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 22
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 23
Answer:
(a) Adenine
(b) Adenosine

Question 25.
The given structure showing the molecule give ready energy for biological activities. Identify the structure.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 24
Answer:
Adenosine triphosphate (ATP)

Question 26.
Schematic diagram of DNA is given. Copy the structure and correct it, if there is any mistake.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 25
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 26

Question 27.
Classify the given terms into two columns and give appropriate heading.
rubber, Glucose, amino acids, drugs, gums, spices, cholesterol, Fatty acids.
Answer:

Primary MetabolismSecondary Metabolism
GlucoseRubber
Amino acidsDrugs
CholesterolGums
Fatty acidsSpices

Question 28.
Progress of a chemical reaction and potential energy changes associated with it is plotted as curve.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 27

  1. What happens to the activation energy of the substrate, when enzyme is added to the reaction system?
  2. Redraw the above graph and also plot another curve showing the progress of the reaction and associated potential energy change, when enzyme is added to the system.

Answer:
1. Activation energy decreases

2.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 28

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 29.
Observe the given graph a and
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 29

  1. State how temperature and pH influences enzyme activity.
  2. Does the substrate concentration influence enzyme activity. If so, how?

Answer:
1. Each enzyme shows its highest activity at a particular temperature. This is called optimum temperature. Low temperature or high temperature reduces the enzyme activity. Same as, there is an optimum pH for enzyme activity. Deviation from this pH reduces the enzyme activity.

2. With the increase in substrate concentration, the velocity of the enzymatic reaction increase at first, as the substrate concentration continues to increase, the increase in the rate of reaction begins to slow down and finally no further rise in velocity occurs. This is because there is no free enzyme molecule to bind additional substrate molecule.

Question 30.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 30
The graph shows the relation between potential energy and progress of reaction. Observe the graph and answer the questions.

  1. Is this reaction”exothermic or endothermic? Give reason.
  2. What happen to the amount of enzyme at completion of reaction?

Answer:

  1. Exothermic. The energy level of substrate is higher than that of product.
  2. No change to enzyme

Question 31.
Observe the diagram.

  1. Name the process showing here.
  2. How is this process would be useful?

Answer:

  1. Competitive inhibition
  2. Competitive inhibitor are often used in the control of bacterial pathogen.

Question 32.
Fill in the blank columns with the correct terms/ sentences.

AB
………. (1)…………..Catalyse oxido – reduction between two substrates.
Transferase……. (1)………..
………. (2)………..Catalyse hydrolysis of ester, glycosidic bond
Lyases………. (2)……………
………. (3)…………..Catalyse inter conversion of optical isomers
Ligase………. (3)…………………..

Answer:

AB
OxidoreductaseCatalyse oxido – reduction between two substrates.
TransferaseCatalyse group transfer between substrates.
HydrolaseCatalyse hydrolysis of ester, glycosidic bond
LyasesRemoval of group from a substrate by clearing double bonds.
IsomeraseCatalyse inter conversion of optical isomers
LigaseCatalyse linking together of two compounds.

Plus One Biomolecules Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Structure of a nucleotide pair in DNA is showing below.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 31
Identify the bonds A, B and C.
Answer:

  • A – Hydrogen bond
  • B – Glycosidic bond
  • C – Ester bond

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Give examples.

  1. Prosthetic group
  2. Co-enzyme
  3. Metal ion required for enzyme activity.

Answer:

  1. Haem is the prosthetic group of enzyme peroxidase.
  2. NADP and NAD contain the Vitamin Niacin.
  3. Zinc present in carboxy peptidase.

Question 3.
Give one word.

  1. The nucleic acids that behave like enzymes
  2. The organic compound tightly bound to the apo enzyme.
  3. The non protein organic compound that are not tightly bound to the apoenzyme.
  4. The protein portion of the enzyme.

Answer:

  1. Ribosome
  2. Prosthetic group
  3. Co-enzyme
  4. Apoenzyme

Question 4.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 32
Identify the molecules A and B and name the bond marked C.
Answer:

  • A – Glucose
  • B – Maltose
  • C- Glycosidicbond

Question 5.
Observe the structure.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 33

  1. Identify the bond formed between amino acids.
  2. How many types of amino acids are present in animal body?
  3. In nutrition some amino acids are required. Write a note on it.

Answer:

  1. Peptide bond
  2. 20 types of amino acids
  3. Note on amino acids:
    • Essential amino acids: The amino acids can not be synthesisecHn the animal body and must be obtained through diet are called essential amino acids.
    • Non-essential amino acids: The amino acids which can be synthesised in the body are called non essential amino acids.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Give name.

  1. The most abundant protein in animal.
  2. The most abundant protein in the whole of the biosphere.
  3. A polymer of fructose.
  4. Paper made from plant pulp is
  5. Complex polysaccharide present in the exoskeleton of Arthropods
  6. Polysaccharide with helical structure

Answer:

  1. Collagen
  2. RuBisCo
  3. Insulin
  4. Cellulose
  5. Chitin
  6. Starch

Question 7.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 34

  1. Identify the structures A, B, C and D.
  2. Name the molecule formed by the esterification of one ‘D’ molecule and three ‘C’ molecule.

Answer:

  1. Structures:
    • A) Glucose
    • B) Amino acid (Glycine)
    • C) Fatty acid
    • D) Glycerol
  2. 1 glycerol + 3 fatty acid Triglyceride

Question 8.
Match the column A and B.

AB
a. BioluminescenceFructose
b. InulinBasic amino acid
c. LysineNicotinamide adenine
dinucleotide
d. SkeltonCtenophora
e. NucleosideSpicules
f. Co-enzymeThymidine

Answer:

AB
a. BioluminescenceCtenophora
b. InulinFructose
c. LysineBasic amino acid
d. SkeltonSpicules
e. NucleosideThymidine
f. Co-enzymeNicotinamide adenine
dinucleotide

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 9.
The activity of the enzyme is inhibited by certain chemicals having close resemblance to the substrate in its molecular structure.

  1. Name the type of inhibition
  2. Point out a suitable example
  3. Mention the Significance of this type of inhibition.

Answer:

  1. Competitive inhibition
  2. Inhibition of succinic dehydrogenase by malonate. Which closely resembles the substrate succinate in structure.
  3. Competitive inhibition are often used in the control of bacterial pathogen.

Question 10.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 35
The figure shows the bonding of a biomolecule

  1. Identify the monomer
  2. Name the bond between the molecules
  3. Name the macromolecule formed

Answer:

  1. Glucose
  2. Glycosidic bond
  3. Starch

Plus One Biomolecules NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Proteins have primary structure. If you are given a method to know which amino acid is at either of the two termini (ends) of a protein, can you connect this information to purity or homogeneity of a protein?
Answer:
In there is one type of amino acid at both termini then it is homopolymer and it cannot be a pure protein. When there are different types of amino acids on both termini then it is a pure protein as proteins are heteropolymer. This property of protein in because of presence of 21 types of amino acids.

Question 2.
Find out and make a list of proteins used as therapeutic agents. Find other applications of proteins (e.g., Cosmetics art)
Answer:

  1. Therapeutic Agents:
    • Contraceptive pills: As they are hormones so they are made up of protein.
    • Nutritional Supplements: Many brands are available as protein supplements. Example: Protinex.
  2. Other Uses: Chicken cubes are used in making soups and dishes.

Question 3.
Explain the composition of triglyceride.
Answer:
Triglycerides are formed from a single molecule of glycerol, combined with three fatty acids on each of the OH groups, and make up most of fats digested by humans. Easter bonds from between each fatty acid and the glycerol molecule.
General structure of a triglyceride Chemical formula:

RCOO-CH2CH(-OOCR)CH2-OOCR,
where R, R’, and R” are longer alkyl chains. The three fatty acids RCOOH, RCOOH and RCOOH can be all different, all the same, or only two the same. Chain lengths of the fatty acids in naturally occurring triglycerides can be of varying lengths, but 16, 18 and 20 carbons are the most common.

Natural fatty acids found in plants and animals are typically composed only of even numbers of carbon atoms due to the way they are biosynthesized from acetyl CoA. Bacteria, however, possess the ability to synthesise odd – and branched – chain fatty acids. Consequently, ruminant animal fat contains odd num¬bered fatty acids, such as 15, due to the action of bacteria in the rumen.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Can you describe What happens when milk is converted into curd or yogurt, from your understanding of proteins?
Answer:
Casein is the predominant phosphoprotein, that accounts for nearly 80% of proteins in cow milk and cheese. Milk-clotting proteases act on the soluble portion of the caseins. K Casein, thus originating an unstable micellar state that results in clot formation. When coagulated with chymosin, casein is sometimes called paracasein.

Casein is not coagulated by heat. It is precipitated by acids and by rennet enzymes, a proteolytic enzyme typically obtained from the stomachs of calves.

Question 5.
Can you attempt building models of biomolecules using commercially available atomic models (Ball and Stick models)?
Answer:
Following three-dimensional structure of cellulose can be made using balls and sticks. Similarly, models of other biomolecules can be made.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 36

Question 6.
Attempt titrating an amino acid against a weak base and discover the number of dissociating (ionizable) functional groups in the amino acid.
Answer:
On titrating against a weak base the amino acid ionizes into following functional groups.

  • NH2 (amino group)
  • COOH (Carboxyl group)

Question 7.
Draw the structure of the amino acid, alanine.

Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 37

Question 8.
What are gums made of? Is Fevicol different?
Answer:
Natural gums are polysaccharides of natural origin, capable of causing a large viscosity increase in solution, even at small concentrations. Fevicol is a synthetic glue. These adhesives are a mixture of ingredients (typically polymers) dissolved in a solvent. As the solvent evaporates, the adhesive hardens.

Depending on the chemical composition of the adhesive, they will adhere to different materials to greater or lesser degrees. These adhesives are typically weak and are used for household applications.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 9.
Explain the basic structure of a nucleotide.
Answer:
A nucleotide is a building block of nucleic acids. A nucleotide has following components:

  1. A heterocyclic compound (base)
  2. A mnonosaccharide, and
  3. A phosphoric acid or a phosphate.

Plus One Biomolecules Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Enzyme often have additional parts intheirstructures that are made up of molecules otherthan proteins. When this additional chemical part is an organic molecule, it is called
(a) cofactor
(b) coenzyme
(c) substrate
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) cofactor

Question 2.
Nucleotides are formed by
(a) sugar and phosphate
(b) purine, pyrimidine and phosphate
(c) purine, pyrimidine, sugar and phosphate
(d) pyrimidine, sugar and phosphate
Answer:
(b) purine, pyrimidine and phosphate

Question 3.
The effectiveness of an enzyme is affected least by
(a) temperature
(b) concentration of the substrate
(c) original activation energy of the system
(d) concentration of the enzyme
Answer:
(c) original activation energy of the system

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Which is an organic compound found in most cells?
(a) Glucose
(b) Water
(c) Sodium chloride
(d) Oxygen
Answer:
(a) Glucose

Question 5.
Enzymes that catalyse inter-conversion of optical, geometrical or positional isomers are
(a) ligases
(b) lyases
(c) hydrolases
(d) isomerases
Answer:
(d) isomerases

Question 6.
Which one of the following is wrongly matched?
(a) Fungi – Chitn
(b) Phospholipid – Plasma membrane
(c) Enzyme – Lipopolysacchande
(d) ATP – Nucleotide derivative
Answer:
(c) Enzyme – Lipopolysacchande

Question 7.
An organic substance bound to an enzyme and essential for its activity is called
(a) coenzyme
(b) holoenzyme
(c) apoenzyme
(d) isoenzyme
Answer:
(a) coenzyme

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 8.
The ‘Repeating unit of glycogen is
(a) fructose
(b) mannose
(c) glucose
(d) galactose
Answer:
(c) glucose

Question 9.
Feedback inhibition of enzymes is affected by which of the following?
(a) Enzyme
(b) Substrate
(c) End products
(d) Intermediate end products
Answer:
(c) End products

Question 10.
The enzyme, which combines with non-protein part to form a functional enzyme, is known as
(a) coenzyme
(b) holoenzyme
(c) apoenzyme
(d) prosthetic group
Answer:
(b) holoenzyme

Question 11.
Benedict’s reagent test is conducted to confirm the presence of
(a) polysaccharides like starch
(b) lipids
(c) reducing sugars
(d) proteins
Answer:
(c) reducing sugars

Question 12.
Which disaccharide has different linkage?
(a) Maltose
(b) Starch
(c) Sucrose
(d) Lactose
Answer:
(c) Sucrose

Question 13.
Select the wrong statement.
(a) The building blocks of lipids are amino acids
(b) Majority of enzymes contain a non-protein part called the prosthetic group
(c) The thylakoids are arranged one above the other like a stack of coins forming a granum
(d) Crossing over occurs at pachytene stage ofmeiosis-l
Answer:
(a) The building blocks of lipids are amino acids

Question 14.
Which of the following is a disaccharide?
(a) Glucose
(b) Fructose
(c) Sucrose
(d) Galactose
Answer:
(c) Sucrose

Question 15.
Lactose is composed of following components.
(a) glucose and fructose
(b) glucose and glucose
(c) glucose, fructose and galactose
(d) glucose and galactose
Answer:
(d) glucose and galactose

Question 16.
The simple polyhydroxy ketone molecule containing 3-7 carbons is a
(a) disaccharide
(b) monosaccharide
(c) polysaccharide
(d) dipeptide
Answer:
(b) monosaccharide

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 17.
How many of the twenty two amino acids are essential for children?
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 9
(d) 7
Answer:
(c) 9

Question 18.
Starch and cellulose are compounds of many units of
(a) glycerol
(b) amino acids
(c) simple sugars
(d) fatty acids
Answer:
(c) simple sugars

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Students can Download Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
_________ is a free and open source software for accounting, developed by Digital Freedom Foundation.
Answer:
GNUKhata

Question 2.
The first step in GNUKhata is ________
(a) To create an organisation
(b) To create Ledger account
(c) Voucher entry
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) To create an organisation

Question 3.
Write the path for starting GNUKhata
Answer:
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 4.
Which among the following is not a level of users in GNUKhata
(a) Managing Director
(b) Admin
(c) Manager
(d) Operator
Answer:
(a) Managing Director

Question 5.
GNUKhata has ………… (a) …………… predetermined groups and ……… (b) ……….. subgroups
Answer:
(a) 13
(b) 16

Question 6.
Amount received by way of cash or cheque is recorded in GNUKhata by using ________ voucher type
Answer:
Receipt Voucher (F4)

Question 7.
Short cut keys for activating Credit Note is _______
(a) Ctrl + 1
(b) Ctrl + 2
(c) Ctrl + 3
(d) Ctrl + 3
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + 3

Question 8.
To clone a voucher means
(a) To delete a voucher
(b) To copy a voucher
(c) To edit a voucher
(d) To print a voucher
Answer:
(b) To copy a voucher

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 9.
From ________ menu, we will enable to view Ledger,
Trial Balance, Balance sheet, Profit and Loss AC etc.
Answer:
Report menu

Question 10.
Which among the following is NOT a feature of GNUKhata?
(a) Free and open source accounting software
(b) Based on double entry book keeping
(c) Coding of Ledger account
(d) Linking of sales and purchase transactions to invoices
Answer:
(c) Coding of Ledger account

Question 11.
What is FOSS?
(a) Free and Open Security Software
(b) Financial Accounting Open Source Software
(c) Free and Open System Software
(d) Free and Open Source Software
Answer:
(c) Free and Open Source Software

Question 12.
Left side of the GNUKhata welcome screen shows __________
(a) Three buttons and dialog box
(b) Description about double entry principles
(c) Printer settings and network
(d) Description about the advantages and developer of GNUKhata
Answer:
(d) Description about the advantages and developer of GNUKhata

Question 13.
Short Cut keys Shift + Ctrl + R is used for ________
Answer:
Create Organisation

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 14.
Choose the statement which is NOT True
(a) We can create a new group but a new sub group can not be created
(b) We can not create a new group but a new sub group can be created
(c) We cannot delete a group or a sub group
(d) We cannot create a sub group of a sub group
Answer:
(a) We can create a new group but a new sub group can not be created

Question 15.
______________ is prepared by an account holder to check whether all cheques deposited by him are cleared and all cheques
issued by him are presented on not.
(a) Bank Reconciliation statement
(b) Trading, Profit and Loss Account & Balance Sheet
(c) Cash Book and Pass Book
(d) Trial Balance
Answer:
(a) Bank Reconciliation statement

Question 16.
Sub Group “Sundry Debtors” coming under ________ Group
Answer:
Current Asset

Question 17.
Choose the right statement
(a) Once organisation is created, the financial year can be changed whenever necessary
(b) Once organisation is created, the financial year can not be changed.
Answer:
(b) Once organisation is created, the financial year can not be changed.

Question 18.
Create is mandatory in GNUkhata
(a) Internal Auditor
(b) Operator
(c) Manager
(d) Admin
Answer:
(d) Admin

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 19.
Which one of the following is free and open source software for Accounting
(a) Tally
(b) PeechTree
(c) GNUKhata
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) GNUKhata

Question 20.
Which accounting software can be easily transformed into Indian languages?
Answer:
GNUKhata

Question 21.
When we open GNUKhata for the first time, we will see ______
(a) Create Organisation window
(b) Voucher Entry window
(c) Welcome screen
(d) User name and Password window
Answer:
(c) Welcome screen

Question 22.
Which type of organisation can be created in GNUKhata?
(a) Profit Making Organisations
(b) Not for Profit Organisations
(c) (a) and (b)
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(c) (a) and (b)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 23.
Only ______ user can log in as ‘Admin’
(а) One
(b) Two
(c) Many
(d) None
Answer:
(a) One

Question 24.
Write path for deleting an organisation.
Answer:
Log in as ‘Admin user’ → Administration menu → Select ‘Delete Organisation’.

Question 25.
The sub Group ‘Plant and Machinery’ is coming under _______________ group.
Answer:
Fixed Assets

Question 26.
Which among the following is not a Profit and loss A/c Group in GnuKhata.
(a) Direct Income
(b) Direct Expenses
(c) Indirect Income
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 27.
There are system generated ledger accounts in GNUkhata
(a) One
(b) Two
(c) Three
(d) Four
Answer:
(d) Four

Question 28.
In GNUKhata, while creating a Ledger account, we have to enter opening balance only if _________
(a) The account belongs to Trading, P/La/c group
(b) The account belongs to a Balance sheet group
(c) It is a cash account
(d) It is a Liability account
Answer:
(b) The account belongs to a Balance sheet group

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 29.
Contra Voucher is used to record.
(a) Deposits or withdrawals of cash from the bank
(b) Transfer of fund from one bank to another
(c) Transfer of cash to petty cash
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write the Path to display Trial Balance.
Answer:
Report → Trial Balance → Enter Date → Select Trial Balance Type → Click on view button

Question 2.
What is BRS?
Answer:
A Bank Reconciliation Statement (BRS) is a Statement prepared by the depositor for the purpose of reconciling the cash book balance with the pass book balance on a certain date.

Question 3.
There are four levels of users in GNUKhata. Who are they?
Answer:

  1. Admin
  2. Manager
  3. Operator.
  4. IntemalAuditor.

Question 4.
Match the following
Group Name Sub-Group Name

Group NameSub-Group Name
(a) Fixed Assets(i) Sundry Creditors
(b) Current Liability(ii) Loans and Advances
(c) Investments(iii) Furniture
(d) Current Assets(iv) Fixed Bank Deposits

Answer:
(a)- (iii); (b) – (i); (c) – (iv); (d) – (ii)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 5.
List down the Income and Expenditure account groups in GNUKhata
Answer:

  • Direct Income
  • Direct Expenses
  • Indirect Income
  • Indirect Expenses

Question 6.
Identify the group and sub group under which the following ledger accounts are to be created.
(a) Depreciation
(b) Carriage inward
(c) Bills Receivable
(d) Drawings
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 1

Question 7.
List down any two features of GNUKhata.
Answer:

  1. It is free and open source accounting software.
  2. It is based on double entry book keeping.
  3. All financial reports can be prepared.
  4. Display of dual ledger facility.
  5. Attachment of source document to vouchers is possible.
  6. Linking of sales ad purchases tranactions to invoice.
  7. Export or import of data from spread sheet is possible.
  8. It ensures password security and data audit facility.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 8.
Define Groups and Sub Groups in GNUKhata.
Answer:
Grouping of account is a method of organising the large number of ledger accounts into sequential arrangement. GNUKhata has 29 predefined Groups and Sub Groups. Out of these, 13 are Groups and 16are Sub Groups.

Question 9.
What are the three buttons in Right side of the GNUKhata welcome screen?
Answer:

  1. Select Existing Organisation
  2. Create Organisation
  3. Language

Question 10.
What is the use of ‘Theme’ tab in GNUKhata Menu Bar?
Answer:
‘Theme’ tab is used to change the theme Background of the screen.

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the specialities of system generated Ledger Accounts
Answer:

  1. GNUKhata has four system-generated ledger account.
  2. We cannot change the name of these accounts.
  3. We can not delete these accounts.

Question 2.
What are the limitations of GNUKhata?
Answer:

  1. Only trained employees can use GNUKhata.
  2. Updations and additions in GNUKhata Software may seriously affect the accounting system.

Question 3.
Mr. Roby prepared a chart for grouping the ledger account. Some errors are identified by his teacher. Help him to rectify the errors.

Ledger AccountGroup
(a) Office expensesDirect Expenses
(b) Carriage InwardDirect Expenses
(c) SalaryIndirect Expenses
(d) Sales TaxDirect Expenses
(e) PurchasesIndirect Expenses

Answer:

Ledger AccountGroup
(a) Office expensesIndirect Expenses
(b) Carriage InwardDirect Expenses
(c) SalaryIndirect Expenses
(d) Sales TaxIndirect Expenses
(e) PurchasesDirect Expenses

Question 4.
Three options are available to view Trail Balance. What are they?
Answer:

  1. Net Trial Balance
  2. Gross Trial Balance
  3. Extended Trial Balance

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 5.
Define the following
(a) Credit note voucher
(b) Journal voucher
(c) Sales voucher
Answer:

(a) Credit noteFor recording a reduction in the price charged to a customer. Function key: Ctrl + 3
(b) JournalFor recording rectifying entries, transfer entries, adjustment entries, purchase of fixed assets on credit and sale of fixed assets on credit.
Function key: F9
(c) SalesFor recording the return of goods by a customer
Function key: Ctrl + 1

Question 6.
Write the Debit and Credit for the following accounting Transactions
(a) Returned goods to Vinu Rs. 5000
(b) Price of goods sold to Mohan reduced by Rs. 500
(c) Vinu returned goods worth Rs. 3000
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 2

Question 7.
What is the importance of ‘Admin’ user in GNUKhata?
Answer:

  • Only one user can login as Admin
  • The creator of organisation is always considered as Admin User
  • The ‘Admin’ user can create the other users ‘Admin’ user

Question 8.
List down the major Sub Groups in the Group ‘Fixed Assets”?
Answer:

  • Building
  • Furniture
  • Land
  • Plant and Machinery

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 9.
Match the following
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 3
Answer:
(a) → ii → x
(b) → iii → y
(c) → i → z

Question 10.
Rearrange the diagram in the right way
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 4
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 5

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How to record the opening balance amount in opening Stock Account?
Answer:
stage 1:

  • Step 1 → Click on Master tab.
  • Step 2 → Select Edit account option from the drop down list.
  • Step 3 → Select Stock at the beginning from the edit account window.
  • Step 4 → Click on Edit Button.
  • Step 5 → Enter opening balance amount.
  • Step 6 → Click on Save button to save the amount.

Stage 2:

  • Step 1 → Click on Transaction tab.
  • Step 2 → Select Journal option to activate Journal Voucher.
  • Step 3 → Enter voucher number.
  • Step 4 → Enter opening date.
  • Step 5 → Select Opening stock a/c in Dr. Account and enter opening stock amount.
  • Step 6 → Select stock at the beginning a/c in the Cr. account and enter the opening stock amount.
  • Step 7 → Give narration.
  • Step 8 → Click on Save button or Press Enter key.

Question 2.
What are the reasons behind the difference in pass book balance and cash book balance.
(a) Cheques issued to suppliers, but not cleared
(b) Cheques deposited, but not honoured
(c) Accounts directly deposited by customers in bank account through electronic transfer
(d) Charges levied by the bank
(e) Interest on deposits credited by the bank
Answer:
S

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 3.
Give a brief explanation about Bank Reconciliation Statement in GNUKhata
Answer:

  1. Bank Reconciliation Statement is done to identify why there is difference between the two balances (Cash Book balance and pass book balance)
  2. The date of transaction is the Transaction Date
  3. The date on which a particular transaction appears in a Pass Book is called the Clearance Date.
  4. The period for which Bank Reconciliation is done is called Reconciliation Period.
  5. The reconciliation is done by comparing the Trans-action Date and Clearance Date.

Question 4.
GNUKhata provides the facility to view Single Ledger Account and Dual Ledger Account. Explain.
Answer:
GNUKhata provides the facility to view two ledger accounts simultaneously for comparing entries. We can view side by side:

  • Two different Ledger accounts for the same period.
  • Two different ledger accounts, each for different period.
  • Same ledger accounts for different periods.

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What do you mean by ‘Year End Activities’?
Answer:
Year End Activities consists of the following Year End Activities

  • Closing Ledger Accounts.
  • Opening Ledger Accounts for the next year.

(A) Closing of Accounts:
GNUKhata has a module to Close books at the click of a mouse, when this module is activated, balances in all expenses and incomes accounts are transferred to Profit and Loss/ Income & Expenditure account and the accounts are closed. After Close
books is done, transactions cannot be recorded but ledger accounts can be viewed.

(B) Opening Ledger Accounts for the next year:
GNUKhata has a module to Roll over ledger accounts at the click of a mouse. This module opens accounts for the next year automatically and since it is automatic, it is error free. When Roll over is done.

  • New organisation with the same name and type is created by GNUKhata for the next accounting year.
  • Assets and liabilities accounts automatically open under its respective Groups and Sub Groups with opening balances.
  • Expenses and income accounts are opened under their respective Groups and Sub Groups without opening balances
  • The closing stock gets transferred to the next year as opening stock.

This module can only be activated after close Books is done.

Question 2.
Write the steps in the preparation of final accounts by using GNUKhata.
Answer:

  • Step 1 – Creation of new organisation
  • Step 2 – Creation of Admin and Login
  • Step 3 – Creation of Sub Groups
  • Step 4 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
  • Step5 – Voucher Entry
  • Step 6 – Editing opening stock and Closing stock account
  • Step 7 – Display Ledger Accounts
  • Step 8 – Display Trial Balance
  • Step 9 – Display P & L Account
  • Step 10 – Display Balance Sheet

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 3.
What are the different vouchers in GNUKhata?
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 6
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Five mark q3 img 38

Question 4.
Write the Journal entry, voucher Type and Short cut keys of the following transactions.

    1. Cash purchases worth Rs. 10,000
    2. Sold goods to Akhil Rs. 6, 000
    3. Akhil returned goods worth Rs. 2,000
    4. Price of goods sold to Akhil reduced by Rs. 500
    5. Credit Purchases from Linjo Rs, 8,000
    6. Returned goods to Linjo Rs. 3,000
  1. Linjo reduced the price of goods sold to us by Rs. 1,000
  2. Cash received from Akhil Rs.3,000
  3. Cash paid to Linjo Rs. 4,000
  4. Cash sales ₹ 800

Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 7

Question 5.
Menu Bar has several Tabs. Can you list down a few of them? Also, mention the short cut keys and activities of such Tabs.
Answer:
Menubar has the following Tabs, The shortcuts for and the activities included in these Tabs are:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 8
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 9

Question 6.
Create an organisation with the following particulars.

  • Name: JOSHWIN ZIAN Enterprises
  • Accounting Year: 01-01-2018 to 31-12-2018
  • Type of organisation: Profit Making
  • Maintain Inventory: No
  • Records Admin Name and Password: Appu, Appose
  • Security Question & answer: Best friends name? Chikku
  • Address: 1234, M. C. Road, Velappaya, Tcr.

Answer:

  • Step1 – Start GNUKhata (Application → Office → GNUKhata)
  • Step 2 – Click on “Create Organisation”.
  • Step 3 – Enter Organisation Name (JOSHWIN ZIAN Enterprises), Press Enter/Tab
  • Step 4 – Select the case, Use down arrow key to select any one of the case and press Enter
  • Step 5 – Select organisation type – ‘Profit making’ and press Enter/Tab
  • Step 6 – Enter From date – 01-01-2018, Press Enter
  • Step 7- Skip the box of Inventory
  • Step 8 – Click on Proceed or Press Enter to open Create Admin window
  • Step 9 – Enter user Name – Appu, Password – Appose and Press Enter/ Tab
  • Step 10 – Enter security Question – “Best friends’s Name’, Press Enter/Tab
  • Step 11 – Enter Answer to security Question Chikku, Press Enter to Login as Admin
  • Step 12 – Select Edit organisation particulars from Master Menu
  • Step13 – Enter Organisation – 1234, MC Road, Velappaya, TCr, and Click on Save

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Practical Work Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Create an organisation with the following particulars

  • Name: TALLMEN WELFARE ASSOCIATION
  • Accounting year: 1-1-2018 to 31-12-2018
  • Type of organisation: Not for profit
  • Maintain Inventory Records: No
  • Admin Name & password: Visal, TCR2018
  • Security Question and Answer Mothers’maiden name? Meenakshy

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Procedure:
Step 1 – Start GNUKhata
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create New Organisation
Click on ‘Create Organisation’ Tab Enter the following informations.

  • Organisation Name: TALLMEN WELFARE ASSOCATION
  • Case: As-Is
  • Organisation type: Not for Profit
  • Financial year: 1-1 -2018 to 31-12-2018
  • Inventory: (Leave it blank)

Click on the Proceed button. Now the organisation is created

Step 3 – Create Admin and Login
Press Enter or Alt+Shift+P to Open Create Admin module.

  • User Name: Visal
  • Password: TCR2018
  • Confirm Password: Retype the password
  • Security Question: Mothers’ Maiden name
  • Answer to the security Question: Meenakshy

Press enter to Login as Admin

Step 4 – Select Edit organisation Particulars from Master Menu. Enter the address of the organisation. Press Enter key to save the details.
Output:

Question 2.
Create an organisation with the following particulars:

  • Name: Mahindra Enterprises
  • Accounting year: 1-04-2018 to 31-3-2019
  • Type of organisation: Profit-making
  • Maintain inventory Records: No
  • Admin Name & Password: Vinesh, Vinumon
  • Security Question & answer: Best friend’s name? Rohit
  • Address: 268, Poonkunnam, Thrissur

Procedure:
Step 1 – Start GNUKhata
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create New Organisation Click on ‘Create Organisation’ Tab
Enter the following informations.

  • Organisation Name: Mahindra Enterprises
  • Case: As-Is
  • Organisation Type: Profit Making
  • Financial year: 1-04-2018 to 31-3-2019
  • Inventory : (Leave it blank)

Click on the Proceed button, is created. Now the organisation

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Step 3 – Create Admin and Login
Press Enter or Alt+Shift+P to Open Create Admin module.

  • User Name: Vinesh
  • Password: Vinumon
  • Confirm Password: Retype the password
  • Security Question: Best friend’s name?
  • Answer to the security Question: Rohit

Press enter to log in as Admin

Step 4 – Select Edit organisation Particulars from Master Menu. Enter the address of the organisation
Press Enter key to save the details.
Output:

Question 3.
Create the following ledger accounts of Najim Traders
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 10
procedure:
Step 1 – Create a New Organisation ‘Najim Traders’- Profit Making with other imaginary data.

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master menu → Create Account
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 11

Step 3 – Create all the ledger accounts and save the details

Step 4 – Display ledger Accounts Report → Ledger view
OR
Display Trial Balance ReportTrial balance → (Select the type of Trial balance) → view
Output:

Question 4.
Create the following Ledger accounts of Anusree agencies.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 12
procedure:
Step 1 – Create New Organisation ‘Anusree Agencies’ – Profit Making with other imaginary data
Enter the following information.

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master Menu → Create Account
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 13
Question 5.
Record the following transactions in appropriate vouchers

  • 1/6/2018 – Riyas started a business with cash – Rs. 1,00,000
  • 2/6/2018 – Opened a bank account with Canara Bank – Rs. 30,000
  • 3/6/2018 – Bought furniture for cash – Rs.10,000
  • 4/6/2018 – Purchase goods from Niyastores – Rs,25,000
  • 5/6/2018 – Cash sales – Rs.12,500
  • 6/6/2018 – Paid for stationery – Rs. 500
  • 7/6/2018 – Cash paid to Niya stores – Rs. 20,000
  • 8/6/2018 – Cash withdraw from Canara bank – Rs.10,000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Procedure:
Step 1 – Create a New Organisation – Profit Making – with imaginary data

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master menu → Create Account
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 14
Step 3 – Create all the ledger accounts and save the details

Step 4 – Enter all the transactions in appropriate vouchers

  1. Select the appropriate voucher form Voucher menu
  2. Enter the Voucher Number and date
  3. Select the Debit account name and enter the amount, then press Enter
  4. Select the credit account name and enter the amount
  5. Enter narration and click on Save.

Output:

Question 6.
Enter the following transactions of Royal Enterprises and display Trial Balance
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 15
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Application Office GNUkhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation “Royal Enterprises – Profit making – with Imaginary data.

Step 3 – Create Admin
Enter the details (Imaginary)

Step 4 – Create appropriate Ledger Accounts
Master → Create account → Select Group → Sub Group → Type Account name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 16

Step 5 – Enter all transactions in appropriate vouchers
Voucher menu → (appropriate voucher) → Enter voucher number → Date → Select Debit account → enter debit amount → Press Enter → Select Credit Account → Enter credit amount → Press Enters → Enter narration → Click on Save

Step 6 – Display Trial balance Report → Trial Balance
Output:

Question 7.
From the following Trial Balance, Prepare Trading Profit and loss account and Balance sheet of Athulya Ltd. as on 31/3/2018
Trial Balance as on 1/4/2017
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 17
Transaction during the year 2017 – 18 is given below

  • Sales (Cash) – Rs. 51000
  • Sales (Credit) – Rs. 34000
  • Purchases (Credit) – Rs. 68000
  • Office expenses – Rs. 2400
  • Wages. – Rs. 1.600
  • Cash received from Debtors – Rs. 16,000
  • Cash paid to creditors – Rs. 35,000
  • Discount received – Rs. 1000
  • Salary – Rs. 5000
  • Rent – Rs. 11,000
  • Carriage Outward – Rs. 700
  • Commission Paid – Rs. 500
  • Insurance Premium – Rs. 4000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Other Adjustments:

  • Salalry Prepaid – Rs. 1500
  • Rent outstanding – Rs. 1000
  • Wages Outstnading – Rs. 800
  • Insurance Premium prepaid – Rs. 2000
  • Closing stock – Rs. 3700
  • Depreciation of Machinery – Rs. 10%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Create an organisation Athulya Ltd- Profit making for the year 1 -4-2017 to 31/3/2018 with imaginary data.

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master → Create account
Analysis Table (Trail Balance)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 18
Create all the ledger a/c under appropriate group and sub Group.

Step 3 – Voucher Entry
Enter all the transactions using appropriate voucher type
Voucher menu /Transaction menu → Select appropriate voucher type → Enter voucher number → Enter voucher Date → Enter Debit account and amount → Enter Credit account and amount → Save
Analysis Table (Transactions)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 19
Analysis Table (Transactions)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 20

Step 4 – Enter the value of opening stock and closing stock

  1. Master menu → Edit Account → Select Stock at the beginning a/c → Click Edit Button
  2. Enter 14000 as Opening Balance. Click on Save button
  3. Enter the values of Opening Stock and closing stock through appropriate voucher

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Voucher menu/Transaction menu → Journal
Analysis Table (Stock)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 21

Step 5 – Display Trial Balance
Report → Trial Balance → Enter Date → Type → Click on the View button

Step 6 – Display Profit and loss Account
Report → Profit and loss → Enter Date → Click on View Button

Step 7 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance sheet → Enter Date → Type → Click on View Button
Output:

Question 8.
Prepare a Bank Reconciliation Statement of Cili Traders, a Profit making organisation, for the period 1-1-2018 to 31-3-2018
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 22
While comparing with Cash book with Pass book, the following details were noted.

  1. Clearance date of cheque No.7125 was on 7/4/18
  2. Cheque No. 9614 cleared only on 2/4/2018
  3. Cheque No. 7127 is cleared on 1/4/18
  4. Clearance date of cheque No.4528 was on 12/2/18
  5. Cheque No. 7129 was cleared on 19/3/2018
  6. All other transaction’s clearance date is same as transaction date

procedure:
Step 1 – Start GNUKhata
Application → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Create an organisation → Cili Traders → Profit making → 1-1-18 to 31-12-2018 → Create admin with imaginary data.

Step 3 – Create Ledger accounts
Master Menu → Create Account → Select Group → SubGroup → Account Name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 23

Step 4 – Voucher Entry
Transaction/Voucher → Select appropriate voucher → Number → Date → DebitCredit → Save

Step 5 – Preparation of Bank Reconciliation Statement Press Alt +R

OR

  1. Master → Bank rEconciliation statement → Select Bank’s Name (Canara Bank) → Set Reconciliation period → Click on view button to view Bank reconciliation screen
  2. Enter clearance date → Click on View statement button
  3. To show the cleared Transactions, click on cleared items
  4. To show the uncleared transactions, click on uncleared items

Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 9.
Enter the following transactions of Sibi Traders and Display Final Accounts as on 31/3/2018
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 24
procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Application Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Click on Create organisation → Enter Details → Sibi Traders → Proft Making → 1-1-2018 to 31-12-2018

Step 3 – Create Admin
Enter imaginary data

Step 4 – Creation of Ledger accounts
Master Menu → Create account → Select Group → SubGroup → Type Account name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 25
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 26

Step 5 – Voucher Entry (based on above Analysis Table)
Transaction menu/Voucher menu → Select appropriate voucher → Enter voucher No → Date → Debit account and amount → Credit account and amount → Narration → Save

Step 6 – Display Trial balance
Report → Trial balance
Display Profits and loss Account
Report → Profits Loss account

Step 8 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance sheet
Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 10.
From the following transactions of Fijo and Joshy associates, prepare Trial Balance, Trading Profit, and Loss account and Balance Sheet.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 27
Adjustments

  1. Depreciation of Furniture Rs. 640
  2. Closing stock valued at Rs.2900

Procedure:
Step 1 – Create Organisation
Click on create Organisation Tab Enter the details
Fijo and Joshy Associates – Profit Making- 1/1/2018-31/12/2018. Enter all other details with imaginary data.

Step 2 – Create Ledger Account
Master → Create Account
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 28
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 29
Create all the above ledger accounts under appropriate Groups and Subgroups.

Step 3 – Voucher Entry
Enter the adjustment entries in appropriate voucher type
Voucher menu/Transaction menu → Select Voucher type → Number → Date → Debit & Credit → Save
Analysis Table (Adjustments)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 29
Step 4 – Display Trial Balance
Report → Trial Balance

Step 5 – Display Profit & Loss Account
Reports → Profit & Loss Account

Step 6 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance Sheet
Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 11.
Given below the Trial Balance of Akhil &Athulya associates as a 31/3/2018. Prepare Final Account for the year 2018-19
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 31
Other Information:

  1. Depreciation of Machinery-4500
  2. Rent outstanding-3000
  3. Building depreciated at 1.0%
  4. Salary Outstanding – 3500
  5. Value of closing stock -18000
  6. Value of Motor vehicle depreciated by 5%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Click on Create Organisation tab. Enter the details
Akhil and Athulya Associates – Profit making 1-4-2018 to 31-3-2019.

Step 3 – Create Admin & Login Use imaginary data.

Step 4 – Creation of new subgroup
Here we need to create a new Sub Group Vehicles under the Group Fixed Assets. Master → Create Account → Select Group Fixed Assets → Select New Sub Group in Sub Group Name → Enter the new Sub Group Name ‘Vehicles’ → Enter the Account Name Motor Vehicles in that Sub Groups Enter the Opening Balance Rs. 1,50, 000 → Save.

Step 5 – Create Ledger Account
Master → Create Account
Analysis Table (Trial Balance)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 32
Create all the ledger accounts under ap¬propriate Groups and Sub Groups

Step 6 – Voucher Entry
Enter all adjustments in appropriate voucher type
Voucher menu/Transaction Menu → Select Voucher → Type → Number → Date Debit account and amount → Credit account and amount → Save.
Analysis Table (Adjustments)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 33

Step 7 – Enter the value of opening stock and closing stock

  1. Master Menu → Edit Account → Select stock at the beginning a/c → Click Edit button
  2. Enter 15000 as opening balances click on. Save button
  3. Enter the values of opening stock and closing stock through appropriate voucher

Voucher Menu/Transaction menu → Journal
Analysis Table (Stock)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 34

Step 8 – Display Trial Balance
Report → Trial Balance

Step 9 – Display profit and loss Account
Report → Profit & Loss

Step 10 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance Sheet
Output:

Question 12.
Enter the following transactions in appropriate vouchers of Jos & Rejina Enterprises and prepare Bank Reconciliation Statement
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 35
Verification of the Cash Book with Bank Pass Book revealed that the Cheque Nos. 8117, 8238 & 5314 were cahsed only on 3rd, 5th and 8th July respectively and the clearance date of all other transactions are same as transaction date.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Application → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Click on Create Organisation → Enter Name → Jos & Rejina Enterprises – Profit Making → (other imaginary data)

Step 3 – Create Admin – Enter the details (imaginary Data)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Step 4 – Create Ledger Account
Master → Create account → Select Group → Sub Group → Type Account name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 36
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 37
Step 5 – VoucherEntry
Transaction / Voucher → Select Appropriate → Enter details.

Step 6 – Preparation of Bank reconciliation statement Press Alt + R
OR

    1. Master → Bank Reconciliation statement → Select Bank’s Name (Union Bank) → Set Reconciliation period → Click on the View button to view Bank Reconciliation screen
    2. Enter clearance data Click on View Statement button
    3. To show the cleared Reconciliation click on cleared items
    4. To know the uncleared Transactions, Click on Uncleared items.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Students can Download Chapter 4 Web Technology Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Specify an attribute of HTML tag.
Answer:
DIR: Indicates documents direction. It can take values rtl or Itr.
Eg. <HTML DIR= “rtl”> This specify that document is to read from right to left.

Question 2.
Mention the default value of size attribute of <BASEFONT>tag.
Answer:
3.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 3.
Name the tag which has ‘Noshade’ attribute.
Answer:
<HR> Tag

Question 4.
Maximum possible value of the size attribute of the <BASEFONT>tag?
Answer:
7.

Question 5.
Salim developed a personal website. In which he has to create an e-mail link. Can you suggest the protocol used to achieve this task?
Answer:
Mailto:
Eg. <A href= “Mailto:[email protected]” >Mail to me</A>.

Question 6.
You want to connect your webpage to the web portal www.yahoo.com. Mention the tag that can be used for this.
Answer:
<A> Anchor Tag
Eg. <A href=”www.yahoo.com”>Yahoo</A>

Question 7.
Specify the main attribute of <IMG> tag used to include an image file in web page.
Answer:
SRC. It specify the name of the image file to be included in the page.
Eg. <IMG SRC=“C:/home,Jpg”>

Question 8.
Select the attribute associated with <IMG> tag from the following: (Name, size, Align, value)
Answer:
Align.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 9.
Write HTML code forgiving hyper link in webpage.
Answer:
<A HREF= “page2.htm”>Page2</A>

Question 10.
The default colour of Vlink is______.
(a) Blue
(b) Green
(c) Red
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(c) Red

Question 11.
The default colour of A link is______.
(a) Blue
(b) Green
(c) Red
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(b) Green

Question 12.
Saritha is assigned with a task of writing explana¬tory notes in an HTML code. Which tag she can utilize.
Answer:
Explanatory notes can be given using <comment> tag. Using two mark up elements. as<!—and →

Question 13.
Pick the odd man out.
(a) BODY
(b) HTML
(c) CENTER
(d) ALIGN
Answer:
(d) ALIGN, all others are tag.

Question 14.
Your school has a web site, www.myschool.org. You want to create a link to this site from your website. Write the code for implementing this.
Answer:
<A href=”www. myschool.org”>My School</A>

Question 15.
HTML was developed by_______.
Answer:
Tim Berners-Lee.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 16.
What are the two major sections of an HTML document?
Answer:
Head section and Body section.

Question 17.
An HTML file is saved with______extension.
(a) .vbp
(b) .mdb
(c) .htm
(d) .fnm
Answer:
(c) .htm or .html

Question 18.
The software used to view web page is______.
(a) Notepad
(b) Web Browser
(c) Web server
(d) Web Editor
Answer:
(b) Web Browser

Question 19.
The default alignment of image in HTML is______.
(a) Left
(b) Right
(c) Center
(d) Inline with content
Answer:
(a) Left

Question 20.
______is an alternative for centralizing a paragraph other than using <P> tag
(a) <ALIGN>
(b) <C>
(c) <CENTER>
(d) <CENTRE
Answer:
(d) <CENTER>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 21.
_______attribute of <A> tag specifies the URL of the hyper linked document.
(a) Name
(b) Target
(c) HREF
(d) SRC
Answer:
(c) HREF

Question 22.
What does HTML stands for?
Answer:
HyperText Markup Language.

Question 23.
Communication on web can be classified into_____and______.
Answer:
Client to Server and Server to Server

Question 24.
The protocol which is responsible for splitting the data into smaller packets is______.
Answer:
TCP

Question 25.
The protocol which is responsible for the routing of data packets through the correct destination is____.
Answer:
IP (Internet Protocol)

Question 26.
TCP / IP stands for_____.
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol/lntemet Protocal.

Question 27.
Identify the protocol responsible fore-mail commu-nication.
(a) DNS
(b) HTTP
(c) TCP/IP
(d) SMTP
Answer:
(d) SMTP

Question 28.
In server to server communication, authentication is done with help of______.
(a) HTTP
(b) Digital certificate
(c) Client
(d) DNS
Answer:
(b) Digital certificate

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 29.
Which server acts between merchant server and bank server for transferring data in encrypted format?
Answer:
Payment Gateway.

Question 30.
Identify the name of a place where servers and networking systems are placed with high security,
(a) Head office
(b) DNS
(c) Data centre
(d) IIS
Answer:
(c) Data centre

Question 31.
Identify the port number which request for the service of sending e-mail communication.
(a) 22
(b) 25
(c) 53
(d) 80
Answer:
(b) 25

Question 32.
The IP address corresponding to a domain name is present in____server.
Answer:
DNS

Question 33.
Programs embedded in HTML documents are termed as____.
Answer:
Scripts

Question 34.
Running of ______scripts can be blocked by the user.
(a) Client side
(b) Server side
(c) Both client side and server side
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Client side

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 35.
A platform-independent server-side scripting language is_____.
Answer:
PHP

Question 36.
Which among the following tools is used for easy formatting and defining style of a document written in HTML?
(a) Ajax
(b) CSS
(c) JSP
(d) JavaScript
Answer:
(b) CSS

Question 37.
Pick the Odd one from the following list and give reason. (IMG, FONT, BR, ALIGN, PRE)
Answer:
ALIGN which is an attribute, all others are tags.

Question 38.
Choose the correct HTML statement to display an image with file name “kerala.jpg” as the background of the web page.
(a) <IMG src=”kerala.jpg”>
(b) <BODY src=”kerala.jpg”>
(c) <BODY bgcolor=”kerala.jpg”>
(d) <BODY background=”kerala.jpg”>
Answer:
(d) <BODYbackground=”kerala.jpg”>

Question 39.
Two ofthe following HTMLtags have same attribute Align’. Identify them. (<IMG>, <MARQUEE>, <B>, <P>, <BODY>)
Answer:
<IMG> AND <P>

Question 40.
Identify the correct HTML statement to draw a hori-zontal line with half the width of the screen.
(a) <HR width=“50%” size= “3″>
(b) <HR length=“50%” size= “3″>
(c) <HR size= “50%” width= “3″>
(d) <HR width= “50%” length= “3″>
Answer:
(a) <HR width=“50%” size= “3″>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 41.
A student wants to display a poem in a web page just like as he entered in the text editor. Which tag in HTML will help him?
Answer:
<PRE>tag

Question 42.
A student created a webpage about his school. The school name is displayed in the page. He wanted to change the style, colour, and size of the school name. Identify the most appropriate tag in HTML needed for that.
Answer:
<FONT> tag

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A student developed a web page about India. He wanted to display a scrolling text moving from right side to left side with a background colour blue. The text is “I Love My Country”.

  1. Identify the tag needed for it.
  2. Write the HTML statement to do the task.

Answer:

  1. <MARQUEE>
  2. <MARQUEE direction-’left” bgcolor=”blue” > I Love My country </MARQUEE>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Write HTML statement for displaying the following text items:

  1. A2B3
  2. A>B

Answer:

  1. A<SUB> 2 </SUB> B <SUP>3</SUP>
  2. A&gt;

Question 3.
Two HTML tags are given. They are <BODY> and <FONT>. Identify and write the attribute of each from the following list. (Size, Text, Link, Bgcolor, Color).
Answer:
The attributes of <BODY> tag are Text, Link and Bgcolor The attributes of <FONT> tag are size and color.

Question 4.
Write the use of Border and Aft attribute of <IMG> tag.
Answer:
Border: This attribute is used forgiving border to an image.

Alt: This attribute issued forgiving an alternate text. When there is no image in the specified location or the browser doesn’t support the image them this text will be displayed.

Question 5.
When a client send request to a server, the server must know which service is demanded by the client.

  1. How does the server identify the type of service requested?
  2. Write the name of any one of the services in the web server.

Answer:

  1. Port number
  2. Any service like FTP, SMTP, HTTP, etc.

Question 6.
Following are steps for searching the IP address of a domain name by a browser. Rearrange them in proper order.
(a) Look in the local memory of ISP
(b) Look in the DNS servers starting from the root server
(c) Look in the local memory of brower
(d) Look in the local memory of Operating System
Answer:
Correct order is c, d, a, b.

Question 7.
Categorise the following tags into Containertags and empty tags.
<B>, <BR>,<A> ,<FRAME>, <FRAMESET>,<LI>, <HR>
Answer:
1. Container tags:
<B>,<A> <FRAMESET>

2. Empty tags:
<BR>,<HR>,<LI>, <FRAME>.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 8.
Write the HTML statement to get the following output.

  1. Commerce
  2. Humanities

Answer:

  1. <B>Commerce</B>
  2. <l>Humanities</l>

Question 9.
Write the HTML statement to get the following output.

  1. H2S04
  2. a2 + b2
  3. Computer

Answer:

  1. H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>
  2. a<sup>2</sup> + b <sup>2</sup>
  3. <b>Computer</b>

Question 10.
Write HTML code to display as follows. The <IMG> tag is used for placing images.
Answer:
The & lt IMG &gt tag is used for placing images.

Question 11.
Name some browsers.
Answer:

  1. Internet Explorer
  2. Netscape Navigator
  3. Opera
  4. Eudora

Question 12.
What is a website?
Answer:
A website is a collection of webpages. A webpage is created by using HTML tags.

Question 13.
What is the role of attributes in an HTML tag?
Answer:
Attributes are parameters for providing additional information within a tag. Attribute values specify certain characteristics of the tag.
Eg: <P align=”right”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 14.
What is an HTML?
Answer:
HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language. It is used to create webpages. It has two types of tags empty and container. The important thing we have to remember in container tag is first opened tag must be closed last.

Question 15.
Name the main attributes of <HR> tag.
Answer:

  1. Size: It specifies the line thickness.
  2. Width: It specifies the length
  3. Noshade: It specifies no shade is given for the line.
  4. Color: It specifies the color.

Question 16.
Mary wants to display her name in various headings. Name the heading tags available in HTML.
Answer:
Heading can be given in six levels from <H1> to <H6>.The tag <H1 > produces big heading. The tag <H6> produces small heading. The heading size reduce from <H1> to <H6> sequentially.

Question 17.
Differentiate between <FONT>and<BASEFONT>tags.
Answer:
<BASEFONT>tag sets the normal font for the entire document text. The font specified will be taken as the default font for the entire document. The main attributes are size, face, and color.

The <FONT> tag defines the font characteristics of the text enclosed. <Font> tag change the font property of the text enclosed within <Font> and</Font> whereas <BaseForrt> tag specifies the default font characteristics.

Question 18.
Explain the different types of hyperlinks.
Answer:
The two types of Hyper Links are

  1. External Hyper Link: This is used two connect the locations of two different web pages
  2. Internal Hyper Link: This is used to connect the different locations of the same web page.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 19.
Write the HTML code to display the following list:

  1. Form
  2. TextBox
  3. Label
  4. Command Button

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers 1

Question 20.
The body section forms the content displayed in the browser window. Briefly explain any four attributes in the BODY tag.
Answer:

  1. Bgcolor – It is used to set background colour.
  2. Background – It is used to set a background picture.
  3. Text – it is used to set the foreground colour.
  4. Left margin – It is used to set the left margin.

Question 21.
HTML has the facility to provide External links as well as Internal links.

  1. Which tag is used to include an External link?
  2. How will you construct an Internal link?

Answer:
1. Anchor Tag i.e. <a href=”filename”>

2. Internal link is used to link two places of the same web page
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers 2
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers 3

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 22.
Categorise the following tags in HTML and write the criterian for the categorisation.
<BR>, <P>, <BODY>, <B>, <HR>, <IMG>
Answer:

Empty_tagContainer tag
<BR><P>
<HR><BODY>
<IMG><B>

Question 23.
Differentiate empty tags and container tag with example.
Answer:
1. Empty tags: It has opening tag only, no closing tag
Eg: <hr>, <br> etc.

2. Container tag: It as both opening and closing tag.
Eg: <html> </html>
<body></body>etc.

Question 24.
Write True or False

  1. Text is an attribute of <BODY> tag to insert a text matter in the web page.
  2. <EM>tagfunctionssimilarto<l>tag.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write and explain any four text formatting tags in HTML.
Answer:
Text formatting tags are given below.

  1. <B> – This tag is based to make the text Bold Eg: <B> Computer application </B>
  2. <l>: This tag is used to make the text in italics eg: <l> computer aplication</l>
  3. <U>:This tag is used to underline the text eg: <U> computer aplication</U>
  4. <S>: This tag is used for striking out the text eg: <S> computer aplication</S>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Match the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 4
Answer:
Correct match as given below
<H2> -Heading-Align
<MARQUEE> – Scrolling text – Bgcolor
<IMG> – Inserting picture – Src.

Question 3.
Briefly explain the use of tags <Q>, <PRE> and <ADDRESS> tags.
Answer:

  • <Q>: It is used to give text within double-quotes.
  • <PRE>: This tag is used to display the content as we entered in the text editor.
  • <ADDRESS>: This tag is used to provide information of the author or owner.

Question 4.
Write a HTML code to develop a web page about Kerala state as shown below:

KERALA STATE
God’s Own Country
Capital: Thiruvananthapuram

The specifications for the page are:

  1. The main heading must be of bigger in size, centralised and bold.
  2. Sub headings must be lesser size than main heading and in italics.
  3. There should be a picture at the center of the page with file name“tree.jpg”.
  4. The background colour of the page must me blue.

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 5

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 5.
PHP is a popular scripting language.

  1. Write whether it is client side or server side.
  2. Write a brief note on PHP.

Answer:

  1. Server side
  2. PHP (PHP Hypertext Preprocessor)
    • It is an open-source, general-purpose scripting language.
    • It is a server side scripting language
    • Introduced by Rasmus Lendorf
    • A PHP file with extension .php
    • It support data base programming the default DBMS is MySQL
    • It is platform-independent
    • PHP interpreter in Linux is LAMP(Linux, Apache, MySQL, PHP)

Question 6.
How client side scripting differs from server side scripting?
Answer:
Following are the differences

Client Side ScriptingServer Side Scripting
Script is copied to client browserto the web server
Executed by the clientExecuted by the server and result is get back to the browser window
Used for Client level validationConnect to the database in the server
It is possible to block by the userCannot possible
Client side scripts depends the type and version of the browserIt does not depend the type and version of the browser

Question 7.
Briefly explain the two types of communication on the web.
Answer:
The two types of communication on the web are given below.
1. Client to Web server communication:
This communication is carried out between client to the web server (shopping site). The technology used to protect data that are transferred from client to web server is https.

2. Web sever to web server communication:
This communication is usually carried out between web .sever (seller) to another web server (normally bank). For the safe transaction. Digital certificate issued by third party web sites are used.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 8.
Compare static and dynamic web pages.
Answer:

Static web pagesDynamic web pages
Content and layout is fixedContent and layout is changed frequently
Never use databaseData base is used
Run by browserIt runs on the server and result get back to the client(browser)
Easy to developNot at all easy

Question 9.
Differentiate Empty tag and Containertag.
Answer:
There are two types of tags, opening tag, and closing tag

  • Empty tag: It has only opening tag and no closing tag
    Eg: <br>, <hr>,..
  • Container tag: It has both opening and closing tags. These tag contains some text data Eg:<html>,<head>,<body>,….

Question 10.
Create a webpage using HTML to display the following message. ‘The symbol H2O represents water’.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 6

Question 11.
While designing a webpage Neena wants to explain the meaning of each step. Can you help her?
Answer:
Neena can use Comments while writing the code. It is a good programming practice. Comments improve readability. It is not the part of a program. Comments
<!—and — >
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 7

Question 12.
Complete the following table.

RGB codeColour Name
#0000FF_________
________Yellow
#FF0000_________
#00FF00_________
________White
________Black

Answer:

RGB codeColour Name
#0000FFBlue
#FFFF00Yellow
#FF0000Red
#00FF00Green
#FFFFFFWhite
#000000Black

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 13.
Give HTML tag to display the sentence “WELCOME TO HTML” as centralized heading, having red colour.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 8

Question 14.
Explain the Main attributes of font tag.
Answer:
<FONT>tag defines the font properties of text enclosed
The main attributes are

  1. Face-This specifies the type of font.
  2. Color-This specifies the colour of the text enclosed
  3. Size- This specifies the font size

Eg. <FONT Face= “Arial” size = “3” color= “magenta”>

Question 15.
John visited a website, it is found that when clicking on a particular text the browser open a new web page. Name the feature and Identify the tag used for this purpose. Write the HTML code to link to a file name “main.html”.
Answer:

  1. Hyper Linking. By clicking on hypertext we can see or go to other webpages or to other section of same document.
  2. <A> tag is used
  3. <Ahref=”main.html”>Main</A>

Question 16.
Antony visited his school website, he could not see the picture of his school instead of that there is a text message “Your browser could not support images”. Why it is happened and write the html code for this.
Answer:
Because the browser he used cannot load the image. He can use Alt attribute of IMG Tag.
<IMG SRC =” D:\school.jpg” Alt=“Your browser could not support images”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 17.
Suppose you want to display a picture named school.jpg located in the ‘Photos’ sub directory of the directory ‘My documents’ of C drive in your web page.

  1. Name the tag used for this purpose.
  2. Write HTML code for the web page.

Answer:
1. <IMG>tag. It is used to display images in webpage

2. <HEAD><TITLE>
</HEAD>
<Body>
<IMG SRC= ‘C;/My documents/Photos/School.jpg’>
</Body>
<html>

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain the main list tags in HTML?
Answer:
HTML provides three basic types of lists-unordered, ordered and definition list.
1. Unordered list:
Unordered list arranges the list items with bullet symbols in front. <UL> and </UL> tag encloses an Unondered list. List items are specified by <LI> tag. The tag <UL> can take values square, circle or disc. The default type is disc.
Eg : <UL>
<LI>COMPUTER
<LI>BIOLOGY
</UL>

2. Ordered list:
In Ordered list, the list items are numbered in sequence. <OL> and </OL> tag encloses an Or-dered list. List items are specified by <LI> tag. The tag <OL> can take values as follows

  • type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,….
  • type = i for i, ii, iii,……
  • type = I for I, II, III,……
  • type = a for a, b, c,…
  • type = A for A, B, C,…..

Eg :<OL>
<LI>COMPUTER
<LI>BIOLOGY
</OL>

3. Definition List:
It is formed by a group of definitions and their descriptions. No bullet symbol or number is provided for the list items. The <DL> and </DL> tags enclose the definition list. The <DT> tag contains the definition term and <DD> tag specifies the description.
Eg: <DL>
<DT>Eeheque
<DD>Electronic cheque
</DL>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Explain the use of <BODY> tag and list any four of its attributes
Answer:
Web page contents are given int the body section. Attributes of body tag are:

  1. BGCOLOR-Specifies background color for the document Body
    Eg. <BODY BGCOLOR= “RED”>
  2. BACKGROUND -Sets the image as background for the document body
    Eg. <BODY BACKGROUNG= “C:\result.jpg”>
  3. TEXT-Specifies the color of the text content of the page
    Eg. <BODYTEXT= “Red”>
  4. LINK- Specifies colour of the hyperlinks that are not visited by the user
  5. ALINK-Specifies the colour of hyperlinks
  6. VLINK-Specifies the color of hyperlinks which are already visited by the viewer.
    Eg. < BODY ALINK= “Cyan” LINK=” Magenta” VLINK= “Orange’’> *
  7. Left margin and Right margin-Sets margin from left and top of the document window.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Students can Download Chapter 3 Functions Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Plus Two Computer Application Functions One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
To read a single character for gender i.e. ’rri’ or ’f’.___function is used.
(a) getch()
(b) getchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getline()
Answer:
(b) getchar()

Question 2.
To use getchar(), putchar(), gets() and puts(), which header file is used?
(a) iostream
(b) cstdio
(c) input
(d) output
Answer:
(b) cstdio

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 3.
To use cin and cout, which header file is needed?
(a) iostream
(b) cstdio
(c) input
(d) output
Answer:
(a) iostrem

Question 4.
Predict the output of the following code snippet
#include<cstdio>
int main()
{
char name[ ] = “ADELINE”;
for(int i=0; name[i]!=’\0′;i++)
putchar(name[i]);
}
Answer:
The output is “ADELINE”.

Question 5.
From the following which is equivalent to the function getc(stdin)
(a) putchar()
(b) gets()
(c) getchar()
(d) puts()
Answer:
(c) getchar()

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 6.
From the following which is equivalent to the function putc(ch,stdout)
(a) putchar(ch)
(b) ch=gets()
(c) ch=getchar()
(d) puts(ch)
Answer:
(a) putchar(ch)

Question 7.
To print a single character at a time which function is used?
(a) puts()
(b) putchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(b) putchar()

Question 8.
To read a string____function is used.
(?) puts()
(b) putchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(b) gets()

Question 9.
To print a string_____function is used.
(a) puts()
(b) putchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(b) puts()

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 10.
Consider the following code snippet
main()
{
char str[80];
gets(str);
for(int i=0,len=0;str[i]!-\0′;i++,len++);
cout<<“The length of the string is” <<len;
getch();
}
Select the equivalent for the under lined statement from the following
(a) int len= strlen(str)
(b) int len=strcmp(str)
(c) int len = strcount(str)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) int len= strlen(str)

Question 11.
Arjun wants to read a string with spaces from the following which is suitable
(a) cin>>
(b) cin.getline(str,80)
(c) str=getc(stdin)
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) cin.getline(str,80)

Question 12.
State whether the following statement is true or false. The'<<‘ insertion operator stops reading a string when it encounters a space.
Answer:
True.

Question 13.
The process of dividing big programs into small programs are called____.
Answer:
Modularization.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 14.
The big programs are divided into smaller programs. This smaller programs are called_____.
Answer:
Functions.

Question 15.
The execution of the program begins at____function.
Answer:
main function.

Question 16.
One of the following is not involved in the creation and usage of a user defined function
(a) Define a function
(b) Declare a function
(c) invoke a function
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 17.
The default data type returned by a function is_____.
(a) float
(b) double
(c) int
(d) char
Answer:
(c) int

Question 18.
After the execution of a function, it is returned back to the main function by executing____keyword.
Answer:
return.

Question 19.
Supplying data to a function from the called function by using______.
Answer:
parameters (arguments).

Question 20.
_____keyword is used to give a value back to the called function.
Answer:
return.

Question 21.
____key word is used to specify a function returns nothing.
Answer:
void

Question 22.
One of the following is not necessary in the function declaration. What is it?
(a) name of the function
(b) return type
(c) number and type of arguments
(d) name of the parameters
Answer:
(d) name of the parameters.

Question 23.
A function declaration is also called_____.
Answer:
prototype.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 24.
Considerthe following declaration
int sum(int a , int b)
{
return a+b;
}
From the following which is the valid function call.
(a) n=sum(10)
(b) n=sum(10, 20)
(c) n=sum(10, 20, 30)
(d) n=sum()
Answer:
(b) n=sum(10, 20)

Question 25.
The ability to access a variable or a function from some where in a program is called_____.
Answer:
scope.

Question 26.
A variable ora function declared within a function is have_____scope.
Answer:
local.

Question 27.
A variable or a function declared out side of all the functions is have_____scope.
Answer:
global.

Question 28.
State True/False

  1. A local variable exist till the end of the program
  2. A global variable destroyed when the sub function terminates

Answer:

  1. False
  2. False

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 29.
consider the following declaration
int x;
int main()
{

}
Here x is a____variable.
Answer:
global.

Question 30.
consider the following declaration
int main()
{
int x;

}
Here x is a_____variable.
Answer:
local.

Question 31.
______parameter is used when the function call does not supply a value for parameters.
Answer:
default.

Question 32.
Consider the following function declaration with optional (default) arguments and state legal or illegal and give the reasons

  1. int sum(int x=10, int y, int z)
  2. int sum(int x=10, int y=20, int z)
  3. int sum(int x=10, int y=20, int z=30)
  4. int sum(int x, int y=20, int z)
  5. int sum(int x, int y=20, int z=30)
  6. int sum(int x, int y, int z=30)
  7. int sum(int x=10, int y, int z=30)

Answer:
There is a rule to make an argument as default argument,i.e., to set an argument with a value that must be in the order from right to left. All the arguments in the right side of an argument must be set first to make an argument as a default argument.

  1. illegal, because y and z are not have values
  2. illegal, because z has no value
  3. legal
  4. illegal, because z has no value
  5. legal
  6. legal
  7. illegal, because x has a value but y has no value.

Question 33.
The parameter used to call a function is called_____.
Answer:
actual parameter.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 34.
The parameters appear in a function definition are_____.
Answer:
formal parameters.

Question 35.
After the distribution of answer scripts, the teacher gives the Photostat copy of the mark list to the students to check the marks. If the students make any change that do not affect the original mark list. There is a similar situation to pass the arguments to a function. What is this method?
(a) call by value
(b) call by reference
(c) call by address
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) call by value

Question 36.
Your class teacher gives you the original mark list to check the mark. If you make any change it will affect the original mark list. There is a similar situation to pass the arguments to a function. What is this method?
(a) call by value
(b) call by reference
(c) call by function
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) call by reference

Question 37.
Consider the following function declaration
int sum(int a, int b)
{
Body
}
Here the arguments are passed by______.
Answer:
call by value method.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 38.
Consider the following function declaration
int sum(int &a, int &b)
{
Body
}
Here the arguments are passed by______.
Answer:
call by reference method.

Qn. 39
A function calls it self is known as______
Answer:
recursive function.

Question 40.
Varun wants to copy a string by using strcpy() function. From the following which header file is used for this?
(a) cstdio
(b) cmath
(c) cstring
(d) cctype
Answer:
(c) cstring

Question 41.
____is a named group of statements to perform a job /task and returns a value.
Answer:
Function.

Question 42.
To use the function setw(), from the following which header file is used.
Answer:
iomanip.h

Question 43.
In his C++ program Ajith wants to accept a lengthy text of more than one line. Which function in C++ can be used in this situation.
Answer:
gets() function can be used to accept a lengthy text.

Question 44.
Choose the C++ function which can print a string.
(a) getche()
(b) putchar()
(c) getline()
(d) puts()
Answer:
(d) puts()

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 45.
Which of the following is a console function?
(a) getline()
(b) write()
(c) put()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(d) getchar()

Question 46.
Pick the odd one out and give reason.
(a) abs()
(b) strlen()
(c) strcmp()
(d) strcpy()
Answer:
(a) abs() – it is a mathematical function. All others are string functions.

Question 47.
Consider the following C++ statement and answer the following question:
char Word[10]=”GOOD DAY”;
Identify the correct output statement to display the string
(a) write (word);
(b) cout.write(word);
(c) cout (word);
(d) cout.write (word, 10);
Answer:
(d) cout.write(wond, 10);

Question 48.
When the number -7 is given as the argument of a predefined function in C++, it returns the value 7. Identify the function.
Answer:
abs(): This function returns the absolute value.

Question 49.
Pick out the correct statement for prototype declaration from the following and also explain the various information it contains.
(a) product (int a, int b);
(b) int product (a,b);
(c) int product (int, int);
(d) product (int, int);
Answer:
(c) int product(int, int);
This prototype specifies the return type, name of function, number, and type of arguments.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 50.
One among the following function prototypes is wrongly written. Identify it. Also given reason.
(a) float test (float);
(b) float test (float, int);
(c) test (float);
(d) int test (int);
Answer:
(c) test(float);
Here the prototype contains no return type.

Question 51.
A user defined function definition is given below. Choose the most appropriate function call statement from the options.
float calc(int x, float y)
{
return (x+y) / 2.0;
}
(a) calc (2, 4)
(b) calc (2.5, 4)
(c) calc (2.5, 4.5)
(d) calc (2, 4.5)
Answer:
(d) calc(2, 4.5);

Question 52.
Which of the following statements are FALSE about a local function?
(a) Declared inside a function
(b) Accessible only within the function it is declared
(c) Accessible from anywhere in the program
(d) Declared outside all other functions
Answer:
c and d are false to a local function.

Plus Two Computer Application Functions Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In a C++ program, you forgot to include the header file iostream.h. What are the possible errors occur in that Program? Explain ?
Answer:
Proto type error. To use cin and cout the header file iostream is a must.

Question 2.
Pick the odd one out from the following and give reason.

  • gets()
  • getline()
  • getch()
  • getchar()

Answer:
getline() – It is a stream function where as the others are console functions.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 3.
Consider the following code snippet.
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int n;
cout<<“Enter a number”; cin>>n;
cout<<‘The number is “<<n;
}
Write down the names of the header files that must be included in this program
Answer:
Here cin and cout are used so the header file iostream must be included.

Question 4.
How does C++ support modularity in programming
Answer:
The process of converting big programs into smaller programs is known as modularisation. This small programs are called modules or sub programs or functions. C++ supports modularity in programming called functions.

Question 5.
The following assignment statement will generate a compilation error.
char str[20]; str=”Computer”
Write a correct C++ statement to perform the same task
Answer:
char str[20] = “Computer”;

OR

char str[20];
strcpy(str,”Computer”); (The header file should be included).

Question 6.
float area(const float pi=3.1415, const float r)
{
r=10;
return pi*r;
}
Is there any problem? If yes what is it?
Answer:
There is an error. The error is , Y is a constant T must be initialised and cannot be changed during execution.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 7.
What are the jobs of a return statement in a program.
Answer:
In the case of a sub function a return statement helps to terminate the sub function and return back to the main function or called function. But in the case of a main function it terminates the program.

Question 8.
Match the following

(a) strcmp()(1) cctype
(b) tolower()(2) cstring
(c) sqrt()(3) cstdlib
(d) abort ()(4) cmath

Answer:
(a) 2
(b) 1
(c) 4
(d) 3

Question 9.
How to invoke a function in C++ program.
Answer:
A function can be called or invoked by providing the name of the function followed by the arguments in parenthesis Eg. sum(m,n);

Question 10.
Briefly explain constant arguments Constant arguments.
Answer:
By using the key word const we can make argument (parameter) of a function as a constant argument.
The value of the const argument cannot be modified within the function.

Question 11.
void initialise()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 1

  1. Identify the error in the, above code and explain its reasons.
  2. Correct the errors.

Answer:

  1. K is a local variable in the function initialize() – It is not accessible in main()
  2. Making the variable K as global we can correct the error.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 12.
List down the advantages of modular programming.
Answer:
Merits of modular programming

  • It reduces the size of the program
  • Less chance of error occurrence
  • Reduces programming complexity
  • Improves reusability

Question 13.
Some statements are given below. Analyse these statements and predict the output:
char str1 (15], str2[15];
str1[15]=” DATA”;
str2[15]=” STORAGE”;
strcat (str2, str1);
cout<<str2;
Answer:
The output is STORAGE DATA. The strings str2 and str1 are concatenated.

Question 14.
If char name [ ] = “Rajeev Kumar”; then what will be output of the following statement? cout<<strlen(name);
Answer:
The length(number of characters) is 12 including space.

Question 15.
Choose the value of ‘n’ after executing the following statements in C++.
char s1[ ]=”KIRAN”; char s2[ ]=”kiran”;
int n = strcmp (s1,s2);
cout<<n;
(a) 0
(b) >0
(c) <0
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) <0. Here string 2, i.e. s2 is greaterthan string1 i.e. s1.
strcmp()- It is used to compare two strings and returns an integer.
Syntax: strcmp(string1 ,string2)

  • if it is 0 both strings are equal.
  • if it is greater than 0(i.e. +ve) string1 is greater than string2
  • if it is less than 0(i.e. -ve) string2 is greater than string1

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 16.
C++ has a built-in function with which we get the result of 42.

  1. Identify the name of the function.
  2. Identify the header file for the above function.

Answer:

  1. pow(4, 2);
  2. The header file used is cmath.

Question 17.
Consider the following C++ statements and predict the output.
int p=isalpha(‘5’);
cout<<p;
Answer:
0.
isalpha() – To check whether a character is an alphabet or not. If the character is an alphabet it returns a value 1 otherwise it returns 0.

Question 18.
Predict the output of the following C++ statements:

  1. cout<<toupper(‘a’);
  2. cout<<(char) toupper(‘a’);

Answer:

  1. It prints 65
  2. It prints A

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 19.
Differentiate formal arguments and actual arguments.
Answer:
The parameter used to call a function is called actual parameter. The parameters appear in a function definition are formal parameters.

Plus Two Computer Application Functions Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Suresh wants to print his name and native place using a C++ program. The program should accept name and native place first
Name is: Suresh Kumar
Address is: Alappuzha
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 2

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 2.
“Programming is Fun”. Write a C++ program to read a string like this in lowercase and print it in UPPER CASE. Without using toupper() library function.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 3
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 4

Question 3.
An assignment, Kumar has written a C++ program which reads a line of text and print the number of vowels in it. What will be his program code?
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cctype>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 5

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 4.
Write a program to display the following output
A
BB
CCC
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 6

Question 5.
Distinguish getchar and gets.
Answer:
getchar is a character function but gets is a string function. The header file cstdio must be included. It reads a character from the keyboard.
Eg.
char ch;
ch=getchar();
cout<<ch;
gets is used to read a string from the key board. It reads the characters upto enter key. The header file
cstdio must be included.
char str[80];
cout<<” Enter a string”;
gets(str);

Question 6.
Write a program to check whether a string is palindrome or not. (A string is said to be palindrome if it is the same as the string constituted by reversing the characters of the original string. Eg. “MALAYALAM”, “MADAM”, “ARORA”, “DAD”, etc.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 7

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 7.
Explain multi character function.
Answer:
getline() and write() functions are multi character functions.
1. getline():
It reads a line of text that ends with a newline character. It reads white spaces also.
Eg.
char line[80];
cin.getline(line,80);

2. write():
It is used to display a string.
Eg.
charline[80];
dn.getline(line, 80);
cout.write(line, 80);

Question 8.
Distinguish between get() and put() functions.
Answer:
1. get() function:
get() is an input function. It is used to read a single character and it does not ignore the white spaces and newline character.
Syntax is cin.get(variable);
Eg. char ch;
cin.get(ch);

2. put() function:
put() is an output function. It is used to print a character.
Syntax is cout.put(variable);
Eg. char ch;
cin.get(ch);
cout.put(ch);

Question 9.
Write a program to read a string and print the number of consonents
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cctype>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 8

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 10.
Write a program to read a string and print the num¬ber of spaces.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 9
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 10

Question 11.
Write a program to count the number of words in a sentence
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 11

Question 12.
Write a program to input a string and display its reversed string using console I / O functions only. For example if the input is “AND” the output should be “DNA”.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 12

Question 13.
Write a program to input a word(say COMPUTER) and create a triangle as follows.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 13
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstring>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 14

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 14.
Write a program to input a line of text and display the first characters of each word. Use only console I /O functions. For example, if the input is “Save Water, Save Nature”, the output should be “SWSN”.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 15

Question 15.
Consider the following code snippet
char ch;
cout<< “Enter an alphabet”; cin>>ch;
cout<<toupper(ch);
What is the output of the above code? Give a sample output. If the above code is used in a computer that has no cctype file, how will you modify the code to get the same output?
Answer:
It reads a character and convert it into uppercase.
Eg:
Enter an alphabet: a
The output is A.
If a computer has no cctype header file the code is as follows.
char ch;
cout<< “Enter an alphabet”; cin>>ch;
if (ch>=97 && ch<<122)
cout<

Question 16.
Read the following program
# include<iostream.h>
int main()
{
cout<<sum(2, 3);
}
int sum(int x, int y)
{return (x + y);}
On compilation on the program, an error will be dis-played. Identify and explain the reason. How can you rectify the problem
Answer:
The compilation of the program starts from the first line and next line and so on( i.e. line by line). While compiling the line cout<<sum(2, 3); The compiler does not understand the word sum(2, 3) because it is not declared yet hence the error prototype required. To rectify this problem there are two methods
First method
Give the function definition just before the main function as follows.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int sum(int x, int y)
{return (x+y);}
int main()
{
cout<<sum(2, 3);
}

Second Method
Give the function declaration(prototype only) in the main function as follows.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int sum(int, int);
cout<<sum(2, 3);
}
int sum(int x, int y)
{return (x+y);}

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 17.
Considering the following function definition;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 16
The expected, desired output is 5! = 120
What will be the actual output of the program? It is not the same as above, why? What modification are required in the program to get the desired output.
Answer:
The output is 0! = 120
Because the address of variable ‘a’ is given to the variable ‘n’ of the function fact(call by reference method). So the function changes its value (i.e. n- -) to 0. Hence the result.

To get the desired result call the function as call by value method in this method the copy of the value of the variable ‘a’ is given to the function. So the actual value of ‘a’ will not changed. So instead of int fact(int &n) just write int fact(int n), i.e., no need of & symbol.

Question 18.
A function is defined as follows
int sum (int a, int b=2)
{return (a+b);}
Check whether each of the following function calls is correct or wrong, Justify your answer

  1. cout<<sum(2, 3);
  2. cout<<sum( 2);
  3. cout<<sum();

Answer:
Here the function is declared with one optional argument. So the function call with minimum one argument is compulsory.

  1. 0 It is valid. Here a becomes 2 and b becomes 3.
  2. It is also valid . Here a becomes 2 and b takes the default value 2.
  3. It is not a valid call. One argument is compulsory.

Question 19.
How do two functions exchange data between them? Compare the two methods of data transfer from calling function to called function.
Answer:
There are two methods they are call by value and call by reference
1. call by value:
In call by value method, a copy of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will not affect the original value.

2. call by reference:
In call by reference method, the reference of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will affect the original value.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 20.
Write down the operation performed by the following statements

  1. int l=strten(“Computer Program”);
  2. charch [] = tolower(“My School”);
  3. cout<<(strcmp(“High”, “Low”)>0 ?

toupper(“High”):tolower(“Low”));
Answer:

  1. The built in function strlen find the length of the string i.e. 16 and assigns it to the variable I.
  2. This is an error because tolower is a character function.
  3. This is also an error because tolower and toupper are character functions.

Question 21.
A line of given length with a particular character is to be displayed. For example, ********** is a line with ten asterisks (*). Define a function to achieve this output
Answer:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
void line (char ch, int n)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 17

Question 22.
Read the following function
int fib(int n)
{
if (n<3)
return 1;
else
return (fib(n-1) + fib(n-2));
}

  1. What is the speciality of this function
  2. How does it work ?
  3. What will be the output of the following code?

for (int i=1; i<5; i++)
cout<<fib(i)<<‘\t’;
Answer:
1. This function is a recursive function. That means the function calls itself.

2. It works as follows
if i = 1, The function fib calls with value 1. i.e. fib(1) returns 1
if i = 2, The function fib calls with value 2. i.e. fib(2) returns 1
if i = 3, The function fib calls with value 3. i.e. fib(3) returns fib(2) + fib(1) i.e. it calls the function again. So the result is 1 + 1 = 2
if i = 4, The function fib calls with value 4. i.e. fib(4) returns fib(3) + fib(2) i.e. it calls the function again. So the result is 2 + 1 = 3

3. The output will be as follows
1 1 2 3.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 23.
Explain scope rules of functions and variables in a C++ program
Answer:
1. Local variable or function:
A variable or function declared inside a function is called local variable or function. This cannot be accessed by the outside of the function.
Eg.
main()
{
int k;//local variable ,
cout<<sum(a,b); // local function
}

2. Global variable or function:
A variable or function declared out side of a function is called global variable or function. This can be accessed by any statements.
Eg.
int k; // global variable
int sum(inta, int b); //global function
main()
{
}

Question 24.
Briefly explain default arguments.
Answer:
A default value can be set for a parameter(argument) of a function. When the user does not give a value the function will take the default value. An important thing remember is an argument cannot have a default value unless all arguments on its right side must have default value.

Functions with valid default arguments are given below

  • float area(int x, int y, int z=30);
  • float area(int x, int y=20, int z=30);
  • float area(int x=10, int y=20, int z=30);

Functions with invalid default arguments are given below

  • float area(int x=10, int y, int z);
  • float area(intx, inty=20, int z);
  • float area(int x=10, int y=20, int z);

Question 25.
Write a program to read a character and check whether it is alphabet or not. If it is an alphabet check whether it is upper case or lower case?
Answer:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 18

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 26.
Write a program to read 2 strings and join them
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 19

Question 27.
Write a program to read 2 strings and compare it.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cstring>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 20

Question 28.
Write a program to read a string and display the number of alphabets and digits and special characters.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 21
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 22

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 29.
A. void change(int&);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 23
B. void change(int);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 24

  1. Predict the output of both programs.
  2. Justify your predictions.

Answer:
1. A. Output
value = 40
B. output
value = 0

2. In the first case (A) the argument x is passed by reference method. So the changes made in the function reflects in main()

In the second case (B) the argument x is passed by value method. So the changes made in the function will not reflect in main().

Question 30.
Write a program to read 2 strings and join them using string function
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstring>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 25

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 31.
Differentiate the outputs of the folloiwng C++ statements and also give reason

  1. cout< <strcmp(“world”, “WORLD”);
  2. cout<<strcmpi(“world”, “WORLD”);

Answer:

  1. >0 Here first string “world” is greater than “WORLD”.
  2. It prints 0. Because strcmpi is same as strcmp() but it is not case sensitive. That means uppercase and lowercase are treated as same.

Question 32.
Match the following.

1. strcmp()a. To combine two strings
2. strcpy ()b. To get 5 from 25
3. strcat ()c. To get 10 from -10
4. sqrt ()d. To change a to A
5. abs()e. To compare two strings
6. toupper()f. To copy one string another

Answer:
1-e, 2-f, 3-a, 4-b, 5-c, 6-d.

Question 33.
Write a C++ program to find the sum of first ‘N’ natural numbers using a user defined function.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int sum(int n)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 26

Question 34.
Write the need for function prototype in a C++ program.
Answer:
When the function is defined after the main function then there is an error called “function should have a prototype”. This is because of the function is defined after the main function. To resolve this a prototype should be declared inside the main function.

Question 35.
Write suitable function prototype after reading the following cases.

  • Case I : The function Volume() takes two arguments, one is float the other is int and it returns its volume.
  • Case II : A function Big() has no arguments and no return type.
  • Case III: A function PrintO takes two floating point type arguments and nothing is returned.

Answer:

  • Case I: float Volume(float,int);
  • Case II: void BigO; or void Big(void);
  • Case III : void Print(float,float) or void Print(double,double);

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 36.
Find the error in the following C++ program and rectify it.
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main ()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 27
Answer:
Error 1: Here function prototype is missing.
Error 2: no need for variable z.
Error 3: no need of the statement z = x*y;
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int multi(int, int);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 28

Question 37.
Consider the following function definition.
int add (int a, int b=2, int c=5)
{
int s = a + b + c;
cout<<“Sum is :”<<s;
}
Predict the output of the above code forthe following function calls:

  1. add (5, 8, 10);
  2. add (5, 8);
  3. add (5);

Answer:

  1. add(5, 8, 10). Here a = 5, b = 8 and c = 10. Then It prints 23(5 + 8 + 10)
  2. add(5, 8). Here a = 5, b = 8 and no value for c then c will take the default value 5. Hence it prints 18(5 + 8 + 5(default value for c)).
  3. add(5). Here a = 5 and no values for b and c, then b and c will take the default values 2 and 5 respectively. Hence it prints 12(5 + 2 + 5(default values for b and c)).

Question 38.
Consider the following C++ program, predict the output and justify it.
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
intsqr(int&);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 29
Answer:
The output are 25 and 6. Here the function uses call by reference method. The function call sqr(a) passes the original value to the function sqr. The function changes the value of b(here a and b are same) to 6. That means a also becomes 6.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 39.
Differentiate local variable and global variable in C++ program.
Answer:
1. Local scope:
A variable declared inside a block can be used only in the block. It cannot be used any other block.
Eg: int sum(int n1,int n2)
{
int s;
s=n1+n2;
return(s);
}
Here the variable s is declared inside the function sum and has local scope;

2. Global scope:
A variable declared outside of all blocks can be used anywhere in the program.
Eg:
int s;
intsum(int n1,int n2)
{
s=n1+n2;
return(s);
}
Here the variable s is declared out side of all functions and we can use variable s any where in the program.

Question 40.
Consider the following C++ code fragment and identify the local function and global function. Also justify your selection.
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 30
Answer:
Here the function print() is declared inside a function hence it is a local function but the function sum() is declared outside of all functions hence it is called global function.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 41.
Read the following C++ program and identify the error and give reason.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
void disp(int);
int main()
int x=10; disp (x); return 0;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 31
Answer:
The variable ‘x’ will not be printed because it is declared in the main() function. That is x is a local variable.

Plus Two Computer Application Functions Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What will be the output of the following code if the userenterthe value “GOOD MORNING”

  1. char String [80];
    gets(string);
    cout<<string;
  2. char String [80]; cin>>string;
    cout<<string;
  3. char ch;
    ch=getchar();
    cout<<ch;
  4. char String [80];
    cin.getline(string,9);
    cout<<string;

Answer:

  1. GOOD MORNING
  2. GOOD
  3. G
  4. GOOD MORN

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 2.
Read a string and print the number of vowels.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cctype>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 32

Question 3.
Describe in detail about the unformatted console i/o functions.
Answer:

  1. Single character functions: This function is used to read or print a character at a time.
    • getchar(): It reads a character from the keyboard and store it in a character variable.
      Eg. char ch;
      ch=getchar();
    • putchar(): This function is used to print a character on the screen.
      Eg. char ch;
      ch=getcharO;
      putchar(ch);
  2. String functions: This function is used to read or print a string.
    • gets(): This function is used to read a string from the keyboard and store it in a character variable.
      Eg. char str[80];
      gets(str);
    • puts(): This function is used to display a string on the screen.
      Eg. char str[80];
      gets(str);
      puts(str);

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 4.
Write a program to input a string and find the number of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, special characters, and white spaces.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 33
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 34

Question 5.
Write a program to input a string and replace all lowercase vowels by the corresponding uppercase letters.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 35
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 36

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 6.
A list of C++ built in functions are given. Classify them based on the usage and prepare a table with proper group names.

  • strcmp()
  • sin()
  • getch()
  • isalpha()
  • pow()
  • puts()
  • strcat()
  • tolower()
  • getchar()
  • isalnum()
  • sqrt()
  • exp()
  • write()

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 37

Question 7.
The factorial of a number, say N is the product of first N natural numbers. Thus, factorial of 5 can be obtained by taking the product of 5 and factorial of 4. Similarly factorial of 4 be found out by taking the product of 4 and factorial of 3. At last the factorial of 1 is 1 itself. Which technique is applicable to find the factorial of a number in this fashion? Write a C++ function to implement this technique. Also explain the working of the function by giving the number 5 as input.
Answer:
A function calls itself is known as recursion.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int fac(int);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 38
The working of this program is as follows. If the value of n is 5 then it calls the function as fac(5). The function returns value 5*fac(4). That means this function calls the function again and returns 5*4*fac(3). This process continues until the value n=1. So the result is 5*4*3*2*1 = 120.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 8.
Read the following program
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int a = 0;
int main ()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 39
Write down the value displayed by the output of the above program with suitable explanation. What are the inferences drawn regarding the scope of variables?
Answer:
The output is 061.
1. Global variable: A variable declared out side of all functions it is known as global variable.

2. Local variable: A variable declared inside of a function it is known as local variable.

If a variable declared inside a function(main or other) with the same name of a global variable. The function uses the value of local variable and does not use the value of the global variable.

Here int a=0 is a global variable. In the main function the global variable ‘a’ is used. There is no local vari-able so the value of ‘a’, 0 is displayed. The statement ‘a++’ makes the value of ‘a’ is 1. It calls the function showval with argument ‘a=1’.

The argument ‘x’ will get this value i.e. ‘x=T. But in the function showval there is a local variable ‘a’ its value is 5 is used. So this function returns 6 and it will be displayed. After this the value 1 of the global variable ‘a’ will be displayed. Hence the result 061.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 9.
The following are function calling statements. Some of them will be executed, while some other generate compilation error. Write down your opinion on each of them with proper justification
Answer:

  1. char ch=getch();
  2. sqrt(25);
  3. strcat (“Computer”, “Program”);
  4. double num = pow(2, 3, 5)
  5. put char(getchar());

Answer:

  1. getch get a character from the console(key board) but does not echo to the screen. So we can’t read a character from the console.
  2. It returns the square root of 25.
  3. It concatenates Program to computer, i.e. we will get a string “computer program”
  4. The function pow should contains only two arguments. But here it contains 3 arguments so it is an error. We can write this function as follows Double num = pow(pow(2, 3, 5)
  5. It reads a character from the console and display it on the screen.

Question 10.
Short notes about character functions and string functions
Answer:
a. Character functions:
1. isalnum(): It is used to check whether a character is alphabet or digit. It returns a non zero value if it is an alphabet or digit otherwise it returns zero.

2. isalpha(): It is used to check whether a character is alphabet or not. It returns a non zero value if it is an alphabet otherwise it returns zero.

3. isdigit(): It is used to check whether a character is digit or not. It returns a non zero value if it is digit otherwise it returns zero.

4. islower(): It is used to check whether a character is lower case alphabet or not. It returns a non zero value if it is a lower case alphabet otherwise it returns zero.

5. isupper(): It is used to check whether a character is upper case alphabet or not. It returns a non zero value if it is an upper case alphabet otherwise it returns zero.

6. tolower(): It is used to convert the alphabet into lowercase.

7. toupper(): It is used to convert the alphabet into upper case.

b. String functions:
1. strcpy(): This function is used to copy one string into another.

2. strcat(): This function is used to concatenate(join) second string into first string.

3. strlen(): This function is used to find the length of a string.

4. strcmp(): This function is used to compare 2 strings. If the first string is less than second string then it returns a negative value. If the first string is equal to the second string then it returns a value zero and if the first string is greater than the second string then it returns a positive value.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 11.
Write a program to perform the following operations on a string

  1. Length of a string
  2. Search a character
  3. Display the string

Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
void len()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 40
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 41
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 42
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 43

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 12.
Write functions to perform the following operations.

  1. sqrt()
  2. power of 2 numbers
  3. sin
  4. cos

Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cmath>
using namespace std;
void sqroot()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 44
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 45
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 46

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 13.
Read the following C++ programs and answer the questions:
Case I
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 47

Case II
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 48

  1. Identify the type of function call in each case.
  2. How do they differ?

Answer:

  1. In case I the method used is Call by value and in Case II is Call by reference.
  2. There are two methods they are call by value and call by reference

a. call by value:
In call by value method, a copy of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will not affect the original value.

b. call by reference:
In call by reference method, the reference of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will affect the original value.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Students can Download Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Plus One Botany Morphology of Flowering Plants One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which plant part is modified into a pitcher in pitcher plants?
(a) stem
(b) leaf
(c) flower
(d) root
Answer:
(b) leaf

Question 2.
Marginal placentation is generally found in the family
(a) Solanaceae
(b) Fabaceae
(c) Liliaceae
(d) Cucurbitaceae
Answer:
(b) Fabaceae

Question 3.
Nonendospermic seeds are found in
(a) pea
(b) groundnut
(c) beans
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 4.
Monocotyledonous seed possess a cotyledon which is represented by
(a) teg men
(b) endosperm
(c) scutellum
(d) aleurone
Answer:
(c) scutellum

Question 5.
Which floral family has (9) + 1 arrangement of anthers in the andoecium
(a) Malvaceae
(b) Fabaceae
(c) Solanaceae
(d) Liliaceae
Answer:
(b) Fabaceae

Question 6.
Based on the relationship, fill in the blanks.

  1. Prop root: Support
    Pneumatophore: ……….
  2. Transpiration: Stomata
    Guttation: ……….

Answer:

  1. breathing /respiration
  2. Hydathode

Question 7.
The arrangement of petals in the flower is known as
Answer:
Aestivation

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 8.
When your teacher asked to write a few examples for root modifications, a student wrote Potato. Is it correct? Why ?
Answer:
No. Stem modification

Question 9.
Write the name of the family which has the given floral formula.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img1
Answer:
Solanaceae

Question 10.
Observe the relationship between first two words and fill up the suitable word in the next place.

  1. Shoot – plumule: Root …………..
  2. Outer integument – testa: inner integnment ……….

Answer:

  1. Radicle
  2. tegmen

Question 11.
Observe the first pair in a and b and then complete the second pair.

  1. gourd – Tendril
    citrus – …………
  2. Brinjal – Hypogynous flower
    Rose – …………..

Answer:

  1. Thom
  2. Epigynous

Question 12.
Identify the family having the given floral formula.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img2
Answer:
Papilionaceae

Question 13.
“Stilt roots are adventitious and give mechanical support’’. How does prop root help the plant?
Answer:
Support the horizontal branches.

Question 14.
“Some flowers are called perigynous”. What do you mean by it?
Answer:
Ovary half inferior or half superior.

Question 15.
From the following terms relating a flower, write its floral formula.
Bisexual; sepals 5 and united petal 5 and united; stamens 5 and epipetalous, carpels 2 and Syncarpous, superior..
Answer:
Solanaceae

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 16.
Based on morphology pick up the odd one and state reason for your selection (Carrot, Beetroot, Potato, Sweetpotato, radish).
Answer:
Potato- because it is a stem modifications.

Question 17.
Phyllotaxy is the arrangement of leaves on the branch. Identify the order of plants showing Alternate, opposite and Whorled phyllotaxy in the following.
(a) China rose, Calotropis, Nerium
(b) Nerium, China rose, Caltropis
(c) Nerium, Caltropis, China rose
(d) China rose, Nerium, Caltropis
Answer:
(a) China rose, Calotropis, Nerium

Plus One Botany Morphology of Flowering Plants Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Identify the types of aestivation in the following diagrams. Justify your answer.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img3
Answer:

  • Valvate aestivation – Petals touching each other.
  • Imbricate aestivation – petals arranged as one completely in, one completely out & others in and out.

Question 2.
“Potato is a stem and sweet potato is a root”. Justify the statement on the basis of external features only.
Answer:
Potato has distinct nodes and internodes whereas sweet potato does not have nodes and internodes. Potato tuber has scale leaves while sweet potato does not have scale leaves.

Question 3.
Identify the given family. Write the floral formula, mention the economic importance.

  1. Bisexual, actinomorphic
  2. Perianth six
  3. Valvate aestivation
  4. Ovary superior, Prilocular with many ovules.

Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img4

Question 4.
Note the difference between the placenta and thalamus.
Answer:

  • Placenta – Region with which ovules are attached to ovary.
  • Thalamus – Region where floral parts are attached

Question 5.
Based on the relationship, fill in the blanks.

  1. Prop root: Support
    Pneumatophore: …………
  2. Transpiration: Stomata
    Guttation: …………….

Answer:

  1. Breathing
  2. Hydathode

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 6.

  1. Identify the type of placentation given below.
  2. Differentiate between apocarpous and syncarpous condition

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img5
Answer:

  1. marginal, axile, parietal, freecentral,basal
  2. apocarpous – free carpels.
    Syncarpous – fused carpels

Question 7.
In early morning, on the margins of leaves water drops are seen. Why does it occur?
Answer:
Guttation – The lose of water in the form of water droplets through water stomata seen on the margin on the leaves.

Question 8.
You are provided with the rhizome of a ginger plant.

  1. Name the part of the plant modified to form this structure.
  2. Write any three differentiating characters.

Answer:

  1. Stem
  2. Presence of Node, internode, terminal bud, axillary buds & scale leaves.

Question 9.
The following diagrams show different types of placentation.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img6

  1. Name the type of placentations.
  2. write one example for each placentation.

Answer:

  1. Marginal, Basal
  2. Pea & Sunflower

Question 10.
L.S of maize seed is given below.Observe the diagram and label the parts.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img7
Answer:

  1. Endosperm
  2. Scutellum
  3. Coleoptile
  4. Plumule

Question 11.
The floral formula of a flower is
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img8

  1. Identify the family.
  2. Write the characters of androecium and gynoecium of this family.

Answer:

  1. Solanaceae
  2. Androecium – Five stamens epipetalous
    Gynoecium – bicarpellary, syncarpous, superior ovary.

Question 12.
Expand the floral formula
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img9
Answer:
zygomorphic bisexual pentamerous gamosepalous papilionaceous corolla diadelphous – Androecium. Gynoecium – superior.

Question 13.
Observe the following diagram and answer to the following Questions.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img10

  1. Name the part of the plant modified in ‘A’ and ‘B’.
  2. Mention their functions.

Answer:

  1. A – Taproot B – Adventitious root
  2. A – Storage B – Respiration

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 14.
The rhizome of ginger is found underground. But it is not root. Give reason.
Answer:
It has nodes, internodes, scale, leaves, axillary bud, terminal bud, adventitious root etc.

Question 15.
How is pinnately compound leaf different from palmately compound leaf?
Answer:
When a number of leaflets are present on either sides of a common axis, rachis it is pinnately compound leaf. Rachis represents the midrib of leaf. Eg. Neem When the leaflets are attached at a common point like fingers on palm it is palmately compound leaf. Eg. Bombax or silk cotton.

Question 16.
Identify the phyllotaxy of A and B
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img11
Answer:
(a) Alternate
(b) Oppositemedicinal.

Question 17.
Roots obtain oxygen from air in the soil for respiration. In the absence or deficiency of 02, root growth is restricted or completely stopped. How do the plants growing in marshlands or swamps obtain their 02 required for root respiration?
Answer:
In marshy area, the plants get 02 through special roots called pneumatophores or respiratory roots.Such roots are negatively geotropic.

Question 18.
During a feild trip to the coastal areas of Kochi, your team saw many trees growing in swampy areas, when thourdughly observed they found many roots growing upwards above the soil level.

  1. In your opinion what kind of roots were seen in that trees?
  2. How do these roots help the trees?

Answer:

  1. Pneumatophore
  2. Gaseous exchange

Question 19.
Rhizome of ginger is like the roots of other plants that grows underground. Despite this fact ginger is a stem and not a root. Justify.
Answer:
Because it possess nodes and internodes, buds, scale leaf, and adventitious roots. Hence these are stem characters.

Question 20.
Tendrils are found in the following plants. Identify whether they are stem tendrils or leaf tendrils,
a. Cucumber
b. Peas
c. Pumpkins
d. Watermelons
Answer:
a,c,d – stem tendril b – leaf tendril

Question 21.
You have heard about several insectivorous plants that feed on insects. Nepenthes or the pitcher plant is one such example, which usually grows in shallow water or in marshlands. What part of the plant is modified into a pitcher1? How does this modification help the plant for food even though it can photosynthesize like any other green plant?
Answer:
Lamina, Plant get additional nutrition (nitrogen) from the digested insect body.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 22.
Mangrove plants have negatively geotropic roots

  1. Name the root
  2. Identify its function

Answer:

  1. Pneumatophore
  2. Gaseous exchange

Question 23.
1. Write the floral formula of the flower having following description (Bisexual, Zygomorhic, Calyx 5 gamosepalous, Corolla 5 polysepalous, vexillary aestivation, Androecium 10 (stamens 9 united and1 free), Gynoecium 1 carpel, ovary superior)
2. Identify the family of the flower
Answer:

  1. K(5)C 1 + 2 + (2) A(9) + 1G1
  2. Fabaceae

Question 24.
The following diagrams show different types of placentation.

  1. Name the types of placentations?
  2. Write one example for each placentations?

Answer:

  1. Marginal and Basal placentation
  2. Marginal – pea, Basal – sunflower

Question 25.
Dicot and monocot leaves shows differences on their leaves mostly in the arrangement of veins, explain it.
Answer:
In Dicot, the veins are repeatedly branched to form network. This is called Reticulate venation. In Monocot, the veins run parallel to one another. This is called Parallel venation.

Question 26.
What is placentation ?Give two types with example.
Answer:
It is the mode of arrangement of ovules in an Ovary

  1. Axile placentation – Arrangement of ovules in the axis of ovary having septa.
  2. Free central placentation – Arrangement of ovules in the central part of ovary without having septa.

Question 27.
Common functions of roots are absorption, fixation and conduction. Besides these, roots perform other functions. Justify this statement with two example.
Answer:
1. In addition to absorption, fixation, and conduction, roots perform mechanical support, eg -prop root and stilt root.

2. Some are Breathing roots eg:- Pneumatophore.

Question 28.
Differentiate between
Hypogynous and Epigynous
Answer:

  1. In hypogynous flower the position of Gynoecium is superior to all other floral whorls.
  2. In epigynous flower the position of Gynoecium is inferior to all other floral whorls.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 29.
A list of some plant parts are given below. Note the morphological modification in each item.

  1. Carrot
  2. Tapioca
  3. Potato
  4. Ginger

Answer:

  1. Carrot – Tap root modification
  2. Tapioca – Adventitious root modification
  3. Potato – Underground stem modification
  4. Ginger – Underground stem modification

Question 30.
Some flowers are called perigynous”. What do you mean by it?
Answer:
In such flowers ovary is half inferior that means position of ovary comes to the same level of other floral whorls lies.
Eg:- plum, rose, and peach

Question 31.
How is pinnately compound leaf different from palmately compound leaf?
Answer:
1. In pinnately compound leaf lamina divided into number of leaflets. It is due to the incisions touch the midrib Eg:- Neem.

2. In palmately compound leaf, lamina is divided into number of leaflets, they are arranged like fingers on the palm Eg:- Silk cotton

Question 32.
When your teacher asked to write a few examples for root modifications, a student wrote Potato. Is it correct? Why ?
Answer:
No, Potato is an example of underground stem modification.

Question 33.
How can you differentiate between free central and axile placentation?
Answer:
In free central placentation ovules are arranged at central axis of ovary without septa but in axile placentation ovules are arranged at central axis of ovary with septa/ cross walls.

Question 34.

  1. Name the aestivations given below
  2. Give an example for each

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img12
Answer:
1. Twisted and imbricate
Hibiscus and cassia

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 35.
Potato is a stem and sweet potato is a root”. Justify the statement on the basis of external features only.
Answer:
Potato is an underground stem. It possess adventitious bud, nodes and internodes Sweet potato is adventitious root modification. It possess root hairs and stores food.

Question 36.
The floral formula of a family is given below Give two examples for economically important plants
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img13
Answer:

  • Indigofera – dye obtained
  • Sesbania- Used as Fodder

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img14

Question 37.
The mature seeds of plants such as gram and peas possess no Endosperm. Why?
Answer:
Endosperm gets used up by the developing embryo during seed development.

Question 38.
Match the following.

Group AGroup B
A.  Aleurone layer

B.  Parthenocarpic fruit

C.  Ovule

D.  Endosperm

i.    without fertilization

ii.    Nutrition

iii.   Double fertilization

iv.  Seed

Answer:
A – iv
B – i
C – iii
D – ii

Question 39.
Mango and coconut are ‘drupe’ type of fruits. In mango fleshy mesocarp is edible.

  1. What is the edible part of coconut?
  2. What does milk of tender coconut represent?

Answer:

  1. Endosperm
  2. Liquid endosperm (free nuclear endosperm)

Question 40.
The mode of arrangements of sepals or petals in a floral bud is known as aestivation. Draw the various types of aestivation possible for a typical pentamerous flower.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img15

Question 41.
Give the technical term and examples of the flowers given here based on the position of the ovary.
Answer:
Hypogynous- hibiscus and perigynous- plum and rose.

Question 42.
Modified adventitious roots in Banyan tree and Maize plant are known in different names

  1. Which are they?
  2. Give its function

Answer:

  1. Banyan tree – Prop root, Maize plant-Stilt root
  2. Mechanical support

Question 43.
Thorns and spines are different modified structures in citrus and cactus.

  1. Which plant part is modified ?
  2. Give its function.

Answer:

  1. Thorns – stem modification, Spines – Leaf modification
  2. protective function

Question 44.
Some important family characters are given below flowers are zygomorphic, Hypogynous, monocarpellary ovary, anthers diadelphous, and papilionaceous corolla

  1. Identify the family
  2. Give 2 economically important plants

Answer:

  1. Fabaceae
  2. dye – Indigofera, fodder yielding – sesbania and Trifolium

Question 45.
Give the technichal term of the following

  1. Two leaves at each node
  2. flowers cannot be divided into two equal halves
  3. position of ovary is higher than other floral whorls
  4. carpels are fused

Answer:

  1. opposite phyllotaxy
  2. asymmetric
  3. Hypogynous flower
  4. syncarpous

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 46.
Mention the statement given below are true or false

  1. In axile placentation ovules are arranged in axis of single-chambered ovary
  2. In Imbricate aestivation floral appendages are in irregular overlapping
  3. In Alstonia phyllotaxy is whorled
  4. Floral axis has definite growth in racemose type

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. True
  4. False

Plus One Botany Morphology of Flowering Plants Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Justify the following statements on the basis of external features.

  1. Underground parts of plants are not always roots
  2. Flower is a modified shoot

Answer:
1. Underground stem get modified for different purposes like food storage, reproduction and perennation. They can be recognized from root in having nodes, internodes,scale leaves, terminal bud &axillary bud eg. Rhizome – ginger, stem tuber- potato.

2. A flower can be considered as a modified shoot because each whorl of a flower represents each node. The leaves at each node is modified to perform functions like protection, attraction and reproduction. The internodes are compressed to form a flower.

Question 2.

  1. What is meant by modification of root?
  2. What type of root is found in
    • banyan tree
    • turnip
    • mangrove tree root modification is the change in shape and structure of root for performing functions other than absorption and conduction.

Answer:

  1. It is modified for performing different functions.
    • Modification of root in banyan tree-prop roots- for mechanical support
    • Turnip-napiform modification – for food storage
    • Mangrove tree-pneumatophores – respiration

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
Some characters of a flower is given below. Bisexual, sepals 5 and united, Petals 5 and united, stamens 5 and epipetalous, carpels 2, syncarpous and superior ovary.

  1. Write its floral formula.
  2. Identify the family.
  3. List any two economically important plants belonging to this family.

Answer:
1.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img16
2. Solanaceae
3. Potato – Solanum tuberosum Tomato – Lycopersicum esculentum

Question 4.
A particular flower of a family is characterised by this type of aestivation.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img17
a) Identify the family.
b) Write the floral formula.
c) Mention two economic importance of the family.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img18

Question 5.
Observe the relationship between first two words and fill up the suitable word in the fourth place.

  1. Shoot – plumule: Root ………..
  2. Nepenthes – pitcher: Utricularia …………
  3. Outer integument – testa: inner integument …………..
  4. Ovule – seed: Ovary – …………..

Answer:

  1. Radicle
  2. Bladder
  3. Tegmen
  4. Fruit

Question 6.
Label the regions of the root tip in the given diagram.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img19
Answer:

  1. Root cap
  2. Meristematic
  3. Region of elongation
  4. Root hair region

Question 7.
The arrangements of ovules within the ovary is known as placentation.

  1. What does the term placenta refer to?
  2. Name and draw various types of placentations in the flower as seen in T.S. or V.S.

Answer:
1. Placenta It is the cushion-like structure in which ovules are arranged.
2.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img20

Question 8.
Define the following terms.

  1. Aestivation:
  2. Placentation:
  3. Actinomorphic:
  4. Zygomorphic:
  5. superior ovary:
  6. Perigynous flower:
  7. Epigynous

Answer:

  1. Aestivation: Arrangement of sepals and petals in an unopened flower bud.
  2. Placentation: The mode of arrangement of ovules within the ovary
  3. Actinomorphic: When a flower can be divided into two equal radial halves at any radial plane. Eg: Chinarose.
  4. Zygomorphic: When a flower can be cut into two equal halves only in one vertical plane. Eg: pea.
  5. Superior ovary: When gynoecium occupies superior or highest position while other parts are situated below it. Eg: Mustard.
  6. Perigynous flower: If the gynoecium is at the centre and all other, parts arise on the rim of the thalamus. Eg: Rose

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 9.
Differentiate between

  1. Racemose and cymose inflorescence.
  2. Fibrous and adventitious root
  3. Apocarpous and syncarpous ovary.

Answer:
1. Racemose:The axis or peduncle shows indefinite growth. Flowers are arranged in acropetal succession.
Cymose: the axis or peduncle shows definite growth or ends in a flower. Flowers are arranged in basipetal succession.

2. Fibrous: The primary root stops its growth and lateral roots arise from the base of the stem.
Adventitious: The roots arise from the part of the plant other than the radicle.

3. Apocarpous: When the carpels of ovary are free.
Syncarpous: When the carpels of ovary are fused.

Question 10.
Floral characters of a plant are given below: Pentamerous flowers, Polypetalous, Stamens 5, Polyandrous, Bicarpellary Syncarpous, Swollen placenta, Oblique ovary.
a) Name the Family of this plant belongs.
b) Write the floral formula of this family.
c) Give two examples with its importance.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img21

Plus One Botany Morphology of Flowering Plants NCERT Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How is a pinnately compound leaf different from a plamately compound leaf?
Answer:
1. Pinnately Compound Leaf.
In pinnately compound leaf a number of leaflets are present on a common axis. Example, neem leaves.

2. Palmately Compound Leaf.
In palmately compound leaf number of leaflets are attached at the common point. Example, cotton leaves.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img22

Question 2.
Explain with suitable examples the different types of phyllotaxy.
Answer:
1. Phyllotaxy. Phyllotaxy is the pattern of arrangement of leaves on the stem or branch. This is usually of three types – alternate, opposite and whorled.

2. In alternate type of phyllotaxy, a single leaf arises at each node in alternate manner, as in china rose, mustard and sunflower plants.

3. In the Opposite type, a pair of leaves arise at each node and lie opposite to each other as in Calotropis and guava plants.

4. If more than two leaves arise at a node and form a whorl, it is called whorled, as in Alstonia.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img23

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
What is meant by modification of root? What type of modification of root is found to the :

  1. Banyan tree
  2. Turnip
  3. Mangrove trees

Answer:
The Primary function of the root is absorption of water and minerals and giving mechanical support to the plant. Sometimes roots get modified to carry out other functions like storage of food or additional mechanical support.

1. Banyan Tree. In banyan trees long roots develop from branches and they hanging deep down to reach the ground. They are providing additional mechanical support to the huge banyan tree. This modification is called a prop root.

2. Turnip. In turnip the root is modified to store extra food.

3. Mangrove Trees. Mangrove trees are found in marshy area. The roots are modified into pneumatophore providing extra passage to allow additional oxygen to the plant.

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The obliquely growing roots that provides mechanical support to the main stem are
(a) prop root
(b) stilt root
(c) pneumatophore
(d) pillar root
Answer:
(b) stilt root

Question 2.
Lateral branches arise from the base of main stem that grows aerially at first and arch downwards in
(a) pistia
(b) mint
(c) jasmine
(d) both b & C
Answer:
(d) both b & C

Question 3.
Pulvinus is found in the leaf base of
(a) Rosaceae
(b) Leguminosae
(c) Malvaceae
(d) Solanaceae
Answer:
(b) Leguminosae

Question 4.
The appearance of more than one leaf at each node is represented by
(a) china rose
(b) sunflower
(c) Alstonia
(d) guava
Answer:
(c) Alstonia

Question 5.
Roots are significant in the exchange of gases
(a) pneumatophore
(b) stilt root
(c) pillar root
(d) assimilatory root
Answer:
(a) pneumatophore

Question 6.
The type of flower cannot be divided into two similar halves in any vertical plane through centre is
(a) actinomorphic
(b) zygomorphic
(c) asymmetric
(d) both b & c
Answer:
(c) asymmetric

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 7.
Ovary half inferior is seen in
(a) plum
(b) china rose
(c) peach
(d) both a & c
Answer:
(d) both a & c

Question 8.
Find out the papilionaceous type of corolla from the given figure.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img24
(a) A
(b) B
(c) C
(d) D
Answer:
(d) D

Question 9.
9. Flowers with bisexual, zygomorphic, diadelphous and monocarpellary superior ovary are the characteristic feature of
(a) fabaceae
(b) malvaceae
(c) solanaceae
(d) liliaceae
Answer:
(a) fabaceae

Question 10.
The type of placentation given here is
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img25
(a) axile
(b) basal
(c) marginal
(d) parietal
Answer:
(d) parietal

Question 11.
Hilum is found in
(a) embryo
(b) seed coat
(c) radicle
(d) chalaza
Answer:
(b) seed coat

Question 12.
Ashwagandha is represented by the family
(a) Fabaceae
(b) papillionaceae
(c) Solanaceae
(d) Liliaceae
Answer:
(c) Solanaceae

Question 13.
The family represented by the floral formula given below is
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img26
(a) fabaceae
(b) papillionaceae
(c) solanaceae
(d) liliaceae
Answer:
(c) solanaceae

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 14.
Negatively geotropic roots are seen in
(a) zaminkand
(b) Rhizophora
(c) maize
(d) euphorbia
Answer:
(b) Rhizophora

Question 15.
In the following picture, plant part is modified for
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img27
(a) storage
(b) respiration
(c) support
(d) protection
Answer:
(a) storage

Question 16.
When the filaments of stamens are attached to the perianth, the condition is
(a) Epiphyllous
(b) epipetalous
(c) adelphous
(d) syngenesious
Answer:
(a) Epiphyllous

Question 17.
In China rose, five carpels are fused at base. This condition is called
(a) Pentacarpellary, syncarpous and pentalocular
(b) Pentacarpellary, apocarpous and pentalocular
(c) polycarpellary, syncarpous and penalocular
(d) Pentacarpellary, syncarpous and multilocular
Answer:
(a) Pentacarpellary, syncarpous and pentalocular

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Students can Download Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Artificial system of classification is mainly based on
(a) vegetative characters
(b) androecium structure
(c) habit and habitat
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 2.
Fusion between morphologically alike gametes is referred to as
(a) anisogamy
(b) isogamy
(c) oogamy
(d) sygamy
Answer:
(b) isogamy

Question 3.
Gametophytic generation is dominant in
(a) bryophytes
(b) pteridophytes
(c) angiosperms
(d) gymnosperms
Answer:
(a) bryophytes

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 4.
Mycorrhizal roots of _____ are associated with some fungal symbionts
(a) Cedrus
(b) pinus
(c) cycas
(d) lichens
Answer:
(b) pinus

Question 5.
Haplontic life cycle is generally occurs in
(a) algae
(b) pteridophytes
(c) bryophytes
(d) gymnosperms
Answer:
(a) algae

Question 6.
Name the type of cell division which produce four haploid cells with new combination of characters from a diploid cell.
Answer:
Meiosis.

Question 7.
Name the dominating pigment in red algae.
Answer:
Phycoerythrin

Question 8.
Name the algae from which algin is prepared commercially.
Answer:
Laminaria (brown algae)

Question 9.
Name the filamentous structure that appears in the mosses due to the germination of spores.
Answer:
Protonema

Question 10.
Give an example of plant group which produce seed but not fruit.
Answer:
Gymnosperms

Question 11.
What is the genetic constitution of endosperm of angiosperm.
Answer:
Triploid

Question 12.
Fill in the blanks.

  1. Bryophytes – Haplo-diplontic
    Gymnosperms – ________
  2. Algin – Brown algae
    Carrageen – _______

Answer:

  1. Diplontic
  2. Red algae

Question 13.
If chlorophyll b is for Chlorophyceae, chlorophyll d is for _______
Answer:
Rhodophyceae

Question 14.
Pick out the correct pairs of plant groups that bearing archegonium.
(a) gymnosperm angiosperm
(b) angiosperm Bryophyta
(c) Bryophyta Pteridophyta
(d) Pteridophyta gymnosperm
Answer:
(d) Pteridophyta gymnosperm

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question. 15
Select the odd one.
(Nitrosomonas, archaebacteria, Nitrococcus, Nitrobacteria)
Answer:
Archaebacteria

Question 16.
The majority of pteridophytes are homosporous ie. they produce similar kind of spores. Give one example of a heterosporous pteridophyte.
Answer:
Selaginella

Question 17.
Archaebacteria, special type of bacteria, which are able to survive in extreme conditions, What is the feature helping them for this?
Answer:
Structure of the cell wall.

Question 18.
Complete the following:
1. Plasmogamy: Fusion of Protoplasms
……………: Fusion of nuclei
Answer:
karyogamy

Question 19.
Laminarin is a stored food in Phaeophyceae, what is the stored food in Rhodophyceae?
Answer:
Floridean starch

Question 20.
The essential element is present in the ring structure of chlorophyll. Which is the element?
Answer:
Mg.

Question 21.
By observing the relationship of the first and fill up the second.
1. Algae and Fungi: Lichen
Roots of higher plants and Fungus:………….
Answer:
Mycorrhiza

Question 22.
Observe the relationship between the first two terms and fill up the blank.

  1. Moss: Protonema; Fern ………….
  2. Egg: Zygote; …………; PEN

Answer:

  1. Prothallus
  2. Secondary Nucleus

Question 23.
Pick the odd one out from the following and justify your answer.
Chlamydomonas, Volvox, laminaria, Chara.
Answer:
laminaria-brown algae

Question 24.
Choose the correct answer.

  1. food materials in fungi are stored in the form of (glucose, glycogen, sucrose, starch)
  2. Membrane covering the vacuole (meninges, tonoplast, pleura).

Answer:

  1. Glycogen
  2. Tonoplast

Question 25.
Name the organisms which are not included in any of the kingdoms,
Answer:
Viruses

Question 26.
Name the plant group in which ‘protonema’ is present.
Answer:
Bryophytes

Question 27.
Observe the relationship between the first two pairs and fill up the blanks.

  1. Sac fungi: Ascomycetes
    Imperfect fungi: …………
  2. Transpiration: Loss of water in the form of water vapour.
    ……………: Loss of water in the form of liquid

Answer:

  1. Deuteromycetes
  2. Guttation

Question 28.
Fusion of two gametes which are dissimilar in size is termed as
(a) Oogamy
(b) Isogamy
(c) Anisogamy
(d) Zoogamy
Answer:
(c) Anisogamy

Question 29.
Holdfast, stipe, and frond constitutes the plant body in case of
(a) Rhodophyceae
(b) Chlorophyceae
(c) Phaeophyceae
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(c) Phaeophyceae

Question 30.
Food is stored as Floridean starch in Rhodophyceae. Mannitol is the reserve food material of which group of algae?
Answer:
Brown algae

Question 31.
A plant shows thallus level of organization. It shows rhizoids and is haploid. It needs water to complete its life cycle because the male gametes are motile. Identify the group to which it belongs to
Answer:
Bryophytes

Question 32.
My body is a gametophyte and I grow under moist and shaded conditions. My group is commonly known as amphibians of the plant kingdom. Name my group.
Answer:
Bryophyta

Question 33.
Name the gametophyte that is free-living structure formed in pteridophytes.
Answer:
Prothallus

Question 34.
The plant body in higher plants is well differentiated and well developed. Roots are the organs used for the purpose of absorption. What is the equivalent of roots in the less developed lower plants?
Answer:
Rhizoids

Question 35.
Plants are generally autotrophic. Can you think of certain plants that are partially heterotrophic?
Answer:
Loranthus – Partial stem parasite

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 36.
Choose the correct pair.
(a) Spirogyra – Algae
(b) Sphagnum – Gymnosperm
(c) Selaginella – Bryophyte
(d) Funaria – Pteridophyte
Answer:
(a) Spirogyra – Algae

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Diagrams of three bryophytes are given below.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img1

 

  1. Observe and give the names of these bryophytes.
  2. Which of the three bryophytes is the most advanced?

Answer:
1. names of these bryophytes.

  • A – Riccia,
  • B – Marchantia,
  • C – Funaria

2. Funaria

Question 2.
Observe the relationship between the first two terms and fill up the blanks.

  1. Kingdom fungi – multicellular decomposer
    Kingdom Plantae – _____________
  2. Gymnosperm – Cone
    Angiosperm – _____________

Answer:

  1. Kingdom plantae – multicellular producers
  2. Angiosperm – flower

Question 3.
Bryophytes are “amphibians of the plant kingdom”. Comment.
Answer:
The vegetative structure are well adapted to live on land but water is essential for fertilization.

Question 4.
Prothallus is the gametophytic stage of Pteridophyte What is protonema?
Answer:
Protonema is the young stage of moss gametophyte

Question 5.

AB
Chlamydomonas

Cycas

Selaginella

Sphagnum

Moss

Pteridophytes

Algae

gymnosperms

Answer:

AB
Chlamydomonas

Cycas

Selaginella

Sphagnum

Algae

Gymnosperms

Pteridophytes

Moss

Question 6.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter in an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img2
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img3

Question 7.
Lichens are the symbiotic association between algae and fungi.

  1. What is symbiosis?
  2. How both the partners help each other?

Answer:
1. Relationship between 2 organisms, both are benefited.

2. Algae – prepare food
Fungus – Gives shelter to algae

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 8.
Arrange the following plants in the table given below, (two members from each group)
Riccia, Spirogyra, Adiantum, Chlorella, Funaria, Cycas, Nephrolepis, Pinus.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img4
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img5

Question 9.
The following is a list of plants. Arrange them in the table given below.
Marchantia, Selaginella, Salvinia, Sunflower, Funaria, Pinus, Maize, Cycas.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img6
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img7

Question 10.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img8

  1. Identify the life cycle pattern?
  2. Cite two examples of organisms showing the above life cycle pattern?

Answer:

  1. Haplo-diplontic.
  2. Bryophytes and pteridophytes

Question 11.
The classical Taxonomy of organisms is mainly based . on morphological characters. But modern taxonomy gives equal weightage to all characters.
Answer:

  1. Name this new approach in modern taxonomy.
  2. Mention any two branches of this taxonomy.

Answer:

  1. Numerical taxonomy
  2. Chemo taxonomy, cytotaxonomy

Question 12.

AB
Sargassum

Bryophyte

ABA

Ribosomes

Anabaena

Stomatal movement

Palade

N2 fixation

Brown alga

Sphagnum

Answer:

AB
SargassumBrown alga
BryophyteSphagnum
ABAStomatal movement
RibosomesPalade
AnabaenaN2 fixation

Question 13.
Pick up the odd one.

  1. Oscillatoria, Spirulina, Actinomycetes, Nostoc
  2. Epipetalous, Epiphyllous, Monadelphous, Apocarpous.

Answer:

  1. Actinomycetes
  2. Apocarpous

Question 14.
Green algae are considered as the ancestors of angiosperms.

  1. Is this statement correct?
  2. Justify your answer.

Answer:

  1. Yes
  2. Chloroplast is present

Question 15.
Red algae reach the maximum depth in sea where no other photosynthetic form grow. Justify.
Answer:
The pigment phycoerythrin absorb the blue-green part of the sunlight’s spectrum. The blue-green light has short wavelength and penetrates deep into the water.

Question 16.
During summer you cannot see the growth of Funaria. What is the reason for this?
Answer:
Water is needed for reproduction – amphibians of plant kingdom.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 17.
By observing the relationship between the first pair, fill up the blanks.

  1. Chlorophyceae: Starch: Rhodophyceae: ……………….
  2. Moss:Protonema; Nephrolepis : ………….

Answer:

  1. Floridean starch
  2. Prothallus

Question 18.
Match the following. (Column I with Column II)
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img9
Answer:

Column IColumn II
a) ChlamydomonasAlgae
b) CycasGymnosperm
c) SelaginellaPteridophyte
d) SphagnumMoss

Question 19.
Observe the relationship between first two terms and fill up the blanks.

  1. Phycobiont: Algal partner
    ……………: Fungal partner
  2. Rhizopus: Phycomycetes
    Penicillin: ………….

Answer:

  1. Mycobiont
  2. Ascomycetes

Question20.
When & where does reduction division takes place in the life cycle of liverwort, moss, ferns, gymnosperm, and angiosperm?
Answer:

  • Liver wort – Reduction division takes place inside the capsule at the time of spore production.
  • Moss – Reduction division takes place inside the capsule at the time of spore formation.
  • Ferns- Reduction division takes place in sporangium in the leaves at the time of spore formation.
  • Gymnosperm – Reduction divsion takes place in the sporangium born on sporophyte of cone.
  • Angiosperm – reduction division takes place at the time of gamete formation in male & female gametophyte during sexual reproduction.

Question 21.
Observe the given table and arrange the matter in an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img10
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img11

Question 22.
Complete the table using appropriate terms.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img12
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img13

Question 23.
What is the basis of the classification of algae?
Answer:
Algae is classified on the basis of pigment Sreserve food.
Eg:

  • Green algae(Chlorophyceae)
  • Red algae(Rhodophyceae)
  • Brown algae(Phaeophyceae)

Question 24.
Liverworts, mosses and ferns usually grow near water. Comment.
Answer:
External water is required for dehiscence of antheridia, liberation of antherozoids, transfer of antherozoids from antheridia to archegonia, opening of archegonial neck and the movement of antherozoids into the archegonial neck for fertilisation during sexual reproduction.

Question 25.
Both gymnosperm & Angiosperm are seed-bearing plants. Why are they classified separately?
Answer:
Gymnosperm and angiosperm are seed-producing plants. In gymnosperm ovules or seeds are not enclosed by ovary wall after fertilisation. In angiosperm, the seeds are protected by ovary wall after fertilisation.

Question 26.
Some characteristic features of the plant is given below.

  • The main plant body posesses rhizoids.
  • The nucleus of main plant body have haploid chromosome number.
  • Zygote develops into a new plant which is dependant on main plant body.
  • The sporophyte has foot, seta, and capsule.

1. Identify the plant.
2. Name the cells where reduction division (meiosis) takes place in the life cycle of the plant.
Answer:

  1. Moss plant
  2. Spore mother cells

Question 27.
Differentiate between the following,

  1. Red algae & Brown algae
  2. Liverworts & Mosses
  3. Homosporous & Heterosporous
  4. Sygamy & Triple fusion

Answer:
1.

Red AlgaeBrown Algae
1. Rhodophycea1. Phaeophycea
2. Predominant pigment is phycoerythrin2. Predominant pigment is fucoxanthin
3. Stored food is laminarin and mannitol3. Stored food is floridean starch

2.

Liver wortsMosses
1. Dorsiventral thallus1. The plant is upright bearing leaves, & rhizoids
2.  Asexual reproduction by fragmentation & gemma2. Asexual reproduction by budding
3.  Protonema absent3.  Protonema stage present

3.

HomosporousHetero sporous
1.  Spores are of same type1.  Spores produce are 2 types
2.  Gametophyte is prothallus & develops male & female sex organs2.  Female Gemetophyte is retained in the parent sporophyte

4.

SygamyTriple fusion
1. The fusion between egg & sperm to give rise to diploid zygote
egg + sperm = zygoten           n              2n
1. The fusion between the secondary nucleus and male gamete to form the Primary endosperm nucleus.
secondary nucleus + sperm =PEN                                     n                                  n           2n

Question 28.
The following is a list of plants.
Riccia, Chlorella, Selaginella, Adiantum, Chalamydomas, Sugarcane, Funaria, Gnetum, Ficus, Cycas. Categorise these plants into Algae, Bryophytes, Gymnosperms, and Angiosperms.
Answer:

  • Algae – Chlorella, Chlamydomonas
  • Bryophytes – Riccia, Funaria
  • Pteridophytes – Selaginella, Adiantum
  • Gymnosperms-Gnetum, Cycas
  • Angiosperms- Sugarcane, Ficus

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 29.
Some plants of cycas produce seeds, but not others. Justify.
Answer:
Cycas plants are dioecious. Male plants of cycas produce microsporophylls and female plants produce megasporophyll. So only female cycas produce seeds and not the males.

Question 30.
Complete the table using the following terms.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img15
Primitive vascular plants, Sprogyra, Triploid endosperm, Marchantia, Naked seeded plants, Pteris, Aquatic autotrophs, Wolfie, Amphibians of plant Kingdom, Pinus
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img16

Question 31.
The following is the list of plants Arrange them in the table given below.
Marchantia, Chlorella, Lycopodium, Adiantum, Clamydomonas, Sunflower, Funaria, Gnetum, Cycas, Maize.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img17
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img18

Question 32.
The haplodiplontic life cycle is present in fern plants. Justify your answer.
Answer:
ln fern plants, the haploid phase is alternate with diploid phase in life cycle. Haploid and diploid phases have equal weightage in life cycle.

Question 33.
What is mixotrophic mode of nutrition?
Answer:
It is the type of nutrition found in Euglena that means both autotrophic and heterotrophic nutrition.

Question 34.
Why seed plants are most successful of all land plants?
Answer:
They are most successful of all land plants because external supply of water is not required for fertilization.

Question 35.
How bryophytes are advanced over algae?
Answer:
In higher bryophytes plant body is differentiate into root-like,stem-like and leaf-like structures. They also shows amphibious habit.

Question 36.
Differentite between gametophyte and sporophyte.
Answer:
Gametophyte is haploid and bears gametes. Sporophyte is diploid and bears spores

Question 37.
In which plant will you look for mycorrhiza and corolloid roots? Also explain what these terms mean, pinus and cycas.
Answer:

  1. Mycorrhiza – association of root and fungus
  2. Corolloid root – association of root and N2 fixing cyanobacteria.

Question 38.
Why rhizoids are not called roots?
Answer:
Rhizoids are haploid and lack vascular tissue, on the other hand, roots are diploid and bear vascular tissue.

Question 39.
Both gymnosperms and angiosperms bear seeds, then why are they classified separately?
Answer:
Because the gymnosperms are plants that bear ovules that are not covered by any ovary wall i.e the seeds of gymnosperms are not covered( naked). But in the angiosperms the seeds remain enclosed inside the fruits.

Question 40.
Why are some bryophytes called liverworts?
Answer:
Some bryophytes are called liverworts because their gametophyte resembles liver lobes.

Question 41.
Heterospory i.e., formation of two types of spores microspores and megaspores is a characteristic feature in the life cycle of a few members of pteridophytes and all spermatophytes. Do you think heterospory has some evolutionary significance in plant kingdom?
Answer:
It is considered as precursor to seed habit. The microspores of angiosperms develops into male gametophyte and megaspores develops into female gametophyte or embryosac.

Question 42.
Most algal genera show a haplontic lifestyle. Name an alga which is

  1. Haplo-diplontic
  2. Diplontic

Answer:

  1. Ectocarpus, polysiphonia and kelps
  2. Fucus

Question 43.
What is heterospory? Give its significance?
Answer:
Heterospory is the production of two kinds of spores in pteridophytes. EgfSalvina and Selaginella They produces 2 kind of spores i.e macrospores- these are large in size and microspores-these are small in size.

Question 44.
The spores and gametes produced by some members of algae are nonmotile.

  1. Do you agree the above statement.
  2. Give reasons.

Answer:

  1. Yes
  2. In members of red algae, the pear-shaped spores and gametes do not possess flagella, hence they are non-motile.

Question 45.
Nature of spore development is different in bryophytes and pteridophytes.

  1. Give the common name for the structures arise from spores.
  2. Identify these two.

Answer:

  1. Gametophyte
  2. Protonema and Prothallus

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 46.

  1. Name the diploid and triploid products formed in Embryosac after fertilisation.
  2. What will be the fate of haploid structures not participate in fertilisation?

Answer:

  1. Diploid – Zygote,
    Triploid – PEN
  2. Synergids and antipodals degenerate after fertilisation.

Question 47.

  1. Identify the types of associations in some members of gymnosperms
  2. Name organisms forms in such associations

Answer:

  1. Mycorrhiza and corrolloid root
    Mycorrhiza – pinus and fungus,
  2. Corrolloid root – N2 fixing cyanobacteria and cycas

Question 48.

  1. Differentiate the nature of plant body in Bryophytes and gymnosperms.
  2. Identify the life cycle shown by the above two plant group

Answer:

  1. Bryophytes – Thallus type (plant body is not differentiated)
    Gymnosperms – Plant body is differentiated into root, stem, and leaves
  2. Bryophytes – Haplo-diplontic
    Gymnosperms – Diplontic

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Mark the statement Ture or False,

  1. Potato, ginger, turmeric are underground stems. They are modified to store food in them
  2. Phyllotaxy is the pattern of arrangement of leaves on the stem or branch
  3. A flower having only stamens or carpel is bisexual.
  4. Calyx and corolla are reproductive organs
  5. Lamina is the green expanded part of the leaf with veins and veinlets
  6. In racemose inflorescence, the main axis terminates in a flower.
  7. Ovary in epigynous flower is superior
  8. If the margin of sepals or petals overlap one another but not in particular direction, the aestivation is called imbricate.
  9. A sterilse stamen is called staminode
  10. The seed coat has two layers the outer testa and the inner tegmen.

Answer:

  1. True
  2. True
  3. False
  4. False
  5. True
  6. False
  7. False
  8. True
  9. True
  10. True

Question 2.
What is heterospory. Give brief account of its significance with examples.
Answer:
Hetrospory is the production of 2 types of spores, Macro (large) and Micro(Small). They give rise to female and male gametophyte respectively. The gamete fused to form zygote which retained in the female gametophyte. This event can be considered as a precursor of seed habit and is an important step in evolution.

Question 3.
Mention the ploidy of the following.

  1. Protonemal cell of a moss
  2. Primary endosperm nucleus in dicot.
  3. Leaf cell of moss.
  4. Fern Prothalus
  5. Meristem cell of monocot
  6. Ovum cell of liverwort
  7. Zygote of a fern

Answer:

  1. n – Haploid
  2. 3n triploid
  3. n – haploid
  4. n – haploid
  5. 2n – diploid
  6. n – haploid
  7. 2n)diploid

Question 4.
Explain briefly the following term with suitable examples. Protonejjia, Antheridium, Archegonium, Diplonticand Sporophyll.
Answer:

  1. Protonema – the 1st gametophytic stage developed by the germination of spores in Bryophytes
  2. Antheridium – Male sex organs which produce flagellated motile male gamtes. eg: Bryophyte
  3. Archegonium – Female sex organ which produce nonmotile egg it is a flask shaped. eg: pteridophyte & Gymnosperm
  4. Diplontic – Diploid sporophytic generation is dominant photosynthetic independent phase of the plant and gametophytic phase is represented by haploid gametophyte eg: gymnosperm & angiosperm

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question. 5
Based on the relationship, fill in the blanks:

  1. Nephrolepis:Prothallus:: Funaria: ……….
  2. Penicillium: ………..:: Agaricus Basidiocarp
  3. …………… Phaeophyceae::Carageen: Rhodophyceae

Answer:

  1. Protonema
  2. Conidia
  3. Mannitol

Question. 6
A few statements regarding algae are given below. Study them carefully and state true or false. If false make them correct.

  1. Algae are thallophytes.
  2. Volvox is a red algae.
  3. Algin is obtained from red algae.
  4. Floridean starch is found in green algae.
  5. Green algae are known as Rhodophyte.
  6. Green algae possess chlorophyll a

Answer:

  1. True
  2. False. Green algae 1
  3. False. Brown algae
  4. False. Red algae
  5. False. Chloropyta
  6. True

Question.7
Write a note on the economic importance of algae & gymnosperm.
Answer:
Algae – increase the level of oxygen in enviomment. They are the chief producers in aquatic ecosystems Some species of brown algae like sargassum, laminaria & Porphyra are used as food. Red algae and brown algae produce hydrocolloids which are water-holding substances. Eg: Gracilaria & gelidium Clorella is used as food supplement by space travelers.

Gymnosperm – Produce alkaloids like terpentine from the stem. They are grown as an ornamental plant. Certain species like ephedra are medicinal.

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How would you distinguish monocots from dicots?
Answer:

  • The easiest way is by looking at their seeds. Seeds of monocots have one cotyledon while that of dicots have two cotyledons.
  • Dicots have tap root system, while monocots have fibrous root system.
  • Dicots show reticulate venation, while monocots show parallel venation.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 2.
Match the followings (column I with column II)
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img19
Answer:

  • a) – iii
  • b) – iv
  • c) – ii
  • d) – i

Question 3.
What is heterospory? Briefly comment on its significance. Give two examples.
Answer:
Certain pteridophytes produce two kinds of spores. This phenomenon is called heterospory.

Question 4.
Both gymnosperms and angiosperms bear seeds, then why are they classified separately?
Answer:
The seeds of gymnosperms are naked, while that of angiosperms are covered by a membrane. That is why they are classified separately.

Question 5.
What is the basis of classification of algae?
Answer:
The main basis of classification of algae is the presence or absence of pigments, which impart an algae
its colour.
1. Chiorophyceae contains chlorophyll a and b, giving it the green colourand the name ‘green algae’.

2. Phaeophyceae contains chlorophyll a and c and fucoxanthin. The fucoxanthin gives it the brown colourand hence the name ‘brown algae’.

3. Rhodophyceae contains chlorophyll a and d and phycoerythrin. The phycoerythrin gives the distinct red colour and hence the name ‘red algae’.

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The major pigment present in brown algae is
(a) chlorophyll a
(b) fucoxanthin
(c) Floridian starch
(d) phycoerythrin
Answer:
(b) fucoxanthin

Question 2.
Hetrospory is first noticed in
(a) gymnosperm
(b) pteridophytes
(c) gymnosperm
(d) ferns
Answer:
(b) pteridophytes

Question 3.
Mycorrhizal association is found in the root of
(a) ferns
(b) pinus
(c) cycas
(d) potytrichum
Answer:
(b) pinus

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 4.
Which one of the following belongs to brown algae
(a) polysiphonia
(b) ectocarpus
(c) ulothrix
(d) volvox
Answer:
(b) ectocarpus

Question 5.
Sexual reproduction of bryophytes involves the production of
(a) sperms
(b) biflagellate antherozooids
(c) antheroids
(d) cilliate antherozooids
Answer:
(b) biflagellate antherozooids

Question 6.
The asexual reproductive structures occurs in bryophytes are
(a) zoospores
(b) gemmae
(c) fronds
(d) rhizoids
Answer:
(b) gemmae

Question 7.
Protonema stage occurs when
(a) spore of bryophytes germinate
(b) seed germinates
(c) spore of ferns germinate
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(a) spore of bryophytes germinate

Question 8.
PEN is formed in
(a) angiosperm
(b) pteridophytes
(c) gymnosperm
(d) ferns
Answer:
(a) angiosperm

Question 9.
The life cycle occurs in ectocarpus is
(a) haplontic
(b) haplodiplontic
(c) diplontic
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) haplodiplontic

Question 10.
Prothallus is
(a) photosynthetic gametophyte
(b) photosynthetic sporophyte
(c) non photosynthetic gametophyte
(d) non photosynthetic sporophyte
Answer:
(a) photosynthetic gametophyte

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 11.
Phylogenetic system of classification is mainly based on
(a) embryological characters
(b) evolutionary characters
(c) morphological Characters
(d) floral characters
Answer:
(b) evolutionary characters

Question 12.
Classification based on cytological information, chromosome number etc.called
(a) chemotaxonomy
(b) cytotaxonomy
(c) numerical taxonomy
(d) cytogenetics
Answer:
(b) cytotaxonomy

Question 13.
In which of the following groups would you place plants having vascular tissue but lacking seeds
(a) pteridophytes
(b) gymnosperms
(c) angiosperms
(d) bryophytes
Answer:
(a) pteridophytes

Question 14.
Life cycle found in pteridophytes
(a) haplontic
(b) diplontic
(c) haplo-diplontic
(d) either haplontic or diplontic
Answer:
(c) haplo-diplontic

Question 15.
Fucoxanthin is the chief pigment in
(a) red algae
(b) brown algae
(c) green algae
(d) blue green algae
Answer:
(b) brown algae

Question 16.
Algae which grow on animals and also occur on shells of molluscs or other invertebrates are called
a) parasitic
b) epiphytic
c) epizoic
d) coenobia

Question 17.
Xylem of gymnosperm lack
(a) tracheids
(b) vessels
(c) both a and b
(d) fibres
Answer:
(b) vessels

Question 18.
Pyrenoids are present in
(a) angiosperms
(b) gymnosperms
(c) algae
(d) pteridophytes
Answer:
(c) algae

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 19.
The first plants to appear after forest fire are the ferns this is because of the survival of their
(a) fronds
(b) rhizome
(c) spores
(d) both a and c
Answer:
(b) rhizome

Question 20.
The endosperm of gymnosperm is
(a) diploid
(b) triploid
(c) tetraploid
(d) haploid
Answer:
(d) haploid

 

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Students can Download Chapter 2 Arrays Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Plus Two Computer Application Arrays One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
From the following which is not true for an array
(a) It is easy to represent and manipulate array variable
(b) Array uses a compact memory structure
(c) Readability of program will be increased
(d) Array elements are dissimilar elements
Answer:
(d) Array elements are dissimilar elements.

Question 2.
Consider the following declaration. int mark (50).
Is it valid? If no give the correct declaration.
Answer:
It is not valid. The correct declaration is as follows, int mark[50]. Use square brackets instead of parenthesis.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 3.
Consider the following declaration. int mark[200].
The index of the last element is____.
Answer:
199.

Question 4.
Consider the following declaration int mark[200]
The index of the first element is_____
Answer:
0.

Question 5.
Consider the following int age[4]={15, 16, 17, 18};
From the following which type of initialisation is this.
(a) direct assignment
(b) along with variable declaration
(c) multiple assignment
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) along with variable declaration

Question 6.
From the following which is used to read and display array elements
(а) loops
(b) if
(c) switch
(d) if else ladder
Answer:
(a) loops

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 7.
Write down the corresponding memory consumption in bytes

  1. int age[10]=_____
  2. charname[10] =_____
  3. intage[10][10]=____

Answer:

  1. 4*10 = 40 bytes (4 bytes for one integer)
  2. 1*10=10 (one byte for each character)
  3. 4*10*10 = 400 (4 * 100 elements)

Question 8.
Consider the following intage[4] = {12, 13, 14};
cout<<age[3]; What will be the output?
(а) 14
(b) 12
(c) 13
(d) 0
Answer:
(d) 0

Question 9.
The elements of 2-dimensional array can be read using_____loop
Answer:
nested loop.

Question 10.
_____is the process of reading / visiting elements of an array
Answer:
traversal.

Question 11.
Anjaly wants to read the 10 marks that already stored in an array and find the total. This process is known as_____
(a) insertion
(b) deletion
(c) traversal
(d) linear search
Answer:
(c) traversal

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 12.
The elements of an array of size ten are numbered from____to___.
Answer:
0 to 9.

Question 13.
Element mark[6] is which element of the array?
(a) The sixth
(b) the seventh
(c) the eighth
(d) impossible to tell
Answer:
(b) the seventh

Question 14.
When a multidimensional array is accessed, each array index is
(a) Separated by column.
(b) Surrounded by brackets and separated by commas.
(c) Separated by commas and surrounded by brackets.
(d) Surrounded by brackets.
Answer:
(d) surrounded by brackets

Question 15.
Write a C++ statement that defines a string variable called ‘name’ that can hold a string of upto 20 characters.
Answer:
char name[21];

Question 16.
_____is a collection of elements with same data type
Answer:
Array

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 17.
Following are some of the statements regarding array. Identify the correct statement.
(a) Array is a collection of elements of same data type.
(b) Array cannot be initialised during the time of declaration.
(c) Array allocates continuous memory.
(d) An array element can be accessed using index or subscript.
Answer:
(a) Array is a collection of elements of same data type.

Question 18.
Which of the following is the correct declaration of an array?
(a) int a(10);
(b) int 10[a];
(c) a[1] int;
(d) inta[10];
Answer:
(d) int a[10];

Question 19.
Which is the last subscript of the array int m[25]?
(a) 24
(b) 25
(c) 0
(d) 26
Answer:
(a) 24

Question 20.
The memory size of the data type float is 4 bytes. What is the total bytes required for the array declaration float salary[10];?
(a) 10
(b) 4
(c) 40
(d) 400
Answer:
(c) 4*10 = 40.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 21.
int num[100]; The above statement declares an array named num that can store maximum_____integer numbers.
(a) 99
(b) 100
(c) 101
(d) Any number
Answer:
(b) 100

Question 22.
If int a[10]; is array, then which element of the array will be referenced as a[4].
Answer:
Fifth element.

Question 23.
Consider the following array declaration int A[ ] = {4, 5, 8}; int B[ ]={2, 10};
Write a valid C++ statement for finding the difference between the last element of the array ‘B’ and the first element of the array ‘A’.
Answer:
B[1] – A[0]; ORA[0] – B[1];

Question 24.
Consider the following code and predict the output.
int sum=0;
int a[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5};
for(i=0;i<4;++i)
{
sum=sum+a[i];
}
cout<<sum;
Answer:
10.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 25.
Which data type is used to declare a variable to hold string data?
Answer:
The data type char is used for this.

Question 26.
The terminating character of string array is______
Answer:
\0 or NULL character.

Question 27.
Write a statement for storing the string “NO SMOKING” using a character array with name ‘ARR’
of minimum size.
Answer:
char APR[11] = ”NO SMOKING”;

Plus Two Computer Application Arrays Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Given some array declaration. Pick the odd man out.
Float a[+40], int num[0-10], double [50]. char name[50], amount[20] of float.
Answer:
char name[50]. It is a valid array decalaration the remaining are not valid.

Question 2.
Whether the statement char text[] = “COMPUTER”; is True / False ? Justify.
Answer:
It is a single-dimensional array. If the user doesn’t specify the size the operating system allocates the number of characters + one (for null character for text) bytes of memory. So here OS allocates 9 bytes of memory.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 3.
Suppose you are given Total mark of 50 students in a class

  1. How will you store these values using ordinary variable?
  2. Is there any other efficient way to store these values? Give reason

Answer:
We have to declare 50 variables individually to store total marks of 50 students. It is a laborious work. Hence we use array, it is an efficient way to declare 50 variables.

With a single variable name we can store multiple elements. Eg: int mark[50]. Here we can store 50 marks. The first mark is in mark[0], second is in mark[1], …etc the fiftieth mark is in mark[49].

Question 4.
Consider the statement charstr[ ] = “PROGRAM” What will be stored in last location of this array. Justify
Answer:
The last location is the null character(\0) because each string must be appedend by a null character.

Question 5.
Explain the needs for arrays
Answer:
Array is collection of same type of elements. With the same name we can store more elements. The elements are distinguished by using its index or subscript. To store 50 marks of 50 students we have to declare 50 variables, it is a laborious work.

Hence the need for arrays arise. By using array this is very easy as follows int mark[50]. Here the index of first element is 0, then 1, 2, 3, etc upto 49.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 6.
Consider the following code and predict the output.
int a[5]= {6, 8, 10,20,40};
cout<<“\n”<<a[3];
cout<<“\n”<<a[1]+1[4];
Answer:
20(The fourth element).
48(Sum of second element 8 and fifth element 40, i.e 8 + 40 =48).

Question 7.
Suppose you need to store the value 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50 into an array. Write different methods to do this problem. Answer:
Method 1:
int a[5]={10, 20, 30, 40, 50};

OR

int a[ ]={10, 20, 30, 40, 50};

Method 2:
int a[5];
a[0]=10;
a[1]=20;
a[2]=30;
a[3]=40;
a[4]=50;

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 8.
What would be the appropriate array declaration to store the following?

  1. Name of a student
  2. Age of 20 students
  3. Mark of 6 subject
  4. Average mark of 10 students in 5 subjects

Answer:

  1. charname[20];
  2. intage[20];
  3. intmark[6];
  4. float mark[10];

Question 9.
Consider the following code and predict the output.
int A[5] = {11, 12, 13, 14, 15};
int i;
for (i=4;i>=0;–i)
{
cout<<“\n”<<A[i];
}
Answer:
It prints the array in reverse order as follows.
15
14
13
12
11.

Question 10.
Predict the output of the following code segment.
int K[ ] = {1, 2, 3, 4};
for (int i=0; i<4; i++)
cout<<K[i] * K[i]<<“\t”;
Answer:
The output is as follows
1 4 9 16
Hint: 1(1*1) 4(2*2) 9(3*3) 16(4*4).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 11.
Consider the following code and predict the output.
Justify your answer.
int A[10] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10};
int sum=0, i;
for(i=0;i<10;++i)
{
if (A[i]%2==0)
{
sum=sum+A[i];
}
}
cout<<“\nSum=”<<sum;
Answer:
The output is 30. That is sum of all even numbers in the array.

Question 12.
Predict the output of the following C++ statement.
char str[8] = “WELCOME”;
cout<<“\n’’<,str[3];
cout<<“\n”<<str;
Answer:
The output is as follows
C(The fourth character)
WELCOME.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 13.
How many bytes will be allocated in the memory for storing the string “MY SCHOOL”? Justify your answer.
Answer:
A total of 10 bytes. 9 bytes is used to store 9 characters in the string MY SCHOOL(including 1 byte for space) and 1 byte is used to store the NULL character.

Plus Two Computer Application Arrays Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Total mark of 50 students in a class are given in an array. A bonus of 10 marks is awarded to all of them. Write the program code for making such a modification.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 1

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 2.
Write the program code for counting the number of vowels from your school name
Answer:
# include
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 2
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 3

Question 3.
Write the program code for counting the number of words from the given string.” Directorate of Higher Secondary Examination”
Answer:
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 4

OR

(Program for more than one space between words)
# include
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 5

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 6
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 7

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 4.
Given a word like “ECNALUBMA” Write the program code for arranging it in into a meaningful word Answer:
# include
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 8

Question 5.
Explain different types of arrays.
Answer:
1. Single dimensional:
It contains only one index or subscript. The index starts from 0 and ends with size-1.
Eg. int n[50]; charname[10];

2. Multidimensional:
It contains more than one index or subscript. The two dimensional array contains two indices, one for rows and another for columns. The row index starts from 0 and end at row size-1 and column index starts at 0 and ends at colunn size-1.
Eg. int n[10][10] can store 10 * 10 =100 elements. The index of the first element is n[0][0] and index of the 100th element is n[9][9].

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 6.
Write a program to read the 5 marks of a students and display the marks and total. Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 9

Question 7.
Explain different array operations in detail.
Answer:

  1. Traversal:- All the elements of an array is visited and processed is called traversal
  2. Search:- Check whether the given element is present or not
  3. Sorting:-Arranging elements in an order is called sorting.

Question 8.
Given a word “COMPUTER”, write a C++ program to reverse the word without using any string functions.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 10

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 9.
Write statements to declare an array and initialize it with the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and print 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
int a[5]={1, 2, 3, 4, 5},i;
for(i=4;i>=0;i-)
cout<<a[i]<<“,”;
}

Question 10.
Consider the following array declaration. Write statements to count how many numbers are greater than zero.
int p[ ] = {-5, 6, -7, 0, 8, 9};
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 11

Question 11.
Write a C++ program to read 10 integer values and find the largest number among them using array.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 12

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 12.
Write a C++ program to accept a string from the keyboard and find its length without using function. For example if “WELCOME” is accepted, the output will be 7.
Answer:
# include
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 13

Question 13.
Considerthe following C++ statements

  1. charword[20];
    cin>>word;
    cout<<word;
  2. char word[20];
    gets(word);
    puts(word);

If the string entered is “HAPPY NEW YEAR”. Predict the output in both cases and justify your answers.
Answer:

  1. HAPPY. When we use cin to accept string then space is the delimiter. The string after space is truncated.
  2. HAPPY NEW YEAR. gets() reads all the characters (including space) upto the user presses the enter key.

Question 14.
Consider the following C++ statements
char str[] = “NO/nSMOKING”;
cout<<str;

  1. What is the output of the above code?
  2. How many bytes will be allocated in the memory for the variable str?

Answer:

  1. NO
    SMOKING. The output is in 2 lines.
  2. A total of 11 bytes is used to store this string.

1 byte for \n. 1 byte for \0(The null character that is automatically appended) and 9 bytes for the remaining characters (N, 0, S, M, 0, K, l, N AND G).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 15.
Write a C++ program to store the given string in an array and display it in reverse order without using string function. For example if ABCD is given, the output should be DCBA.
Answer:
# include
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 14

Plus Two Computer Application Arrays Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Collect the heights of 12 students from your class in which 7 students are male and others are female students. Suppose these male and female students be seated in two separate benches and you are given a place which is used for sitting these 12 students in linear form. How will you combine and make them sit without mixing male/female students? Write a program for the same.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 15

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 16

Question 2.
Write a program to read 3 marks of 5 students and find the total and display it
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 17

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 3.
Write a program to read a string and a character and find the character by using linear search.
Answer:
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 18

Question 4.
Write a program to read a string and find the no. of vowels consonents and special characters.
Answer:
# include
#include
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 19
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 20

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 5.
Write a program to accept marks of 10 students and find out the largest and smallest mark from the list.

OR

Write a C++ program to store the scores of 10 batsmen of a school cricket team and find the largest and smallest score.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 21

Question 6.
Write a C++ program to read 6 marks of a student and find total and average mark.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 22

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 7.
Write a C++ proram to accept a sentence and count the number of times the letter ‘s’ occurs in it. For example if the sentence is This is my school’, the output should be 3.
Answer:
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 23

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Students can Download Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Plus Two Accountancy Data Base Management System for Accounting One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
DBMS stands for __________
Answer:
Data Base Management system.

Question 2.
Name of database object to hold data
(a) Tables
(b) Forms
(c) Queries
(d) Reports
Answer:
(a) Tables

Question 3.
LibreOffice Base is a
a) Word Processing Software
b) Presentation Software
c) Spread sheet Software
d) Data Base Management Software
Answer:
d) Data Base Management Software

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 4.
The common fields used in a relationship between tables are called
(a) Joint field
(b) Main field
(c) Key field
(d) Table field
Answer:
(c) Key field

Question 5.
The result of Query can be displayed by clicking on ___________
Answer:
Run Button

Question 6.
SQL stands for _______
Answer:
Structural Query Language

Question 7.
______ denotes the number of rows in the table
(a) Tuple
(b) Cardinality
(c) DBMS
(d) Domain
Answer:
(b) Cardinality

Question 8.
A single row in the table is called
(a) Attribute
(b) Tuple
(c) Column
(d) Cardinality
Answer:
(b) Tuple

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 9.
Database in LibreOffice Base is called ________
(a) Data group
(b) Mass Data
(c) Rows and columns
(d) Data Source
Answer:
(d) Data Source

Question 10.
A data base consists of a number of that ______ contains the individual pieces of data
Answer:
fields

Question 11.
A _________ of the database is a group of fields
(a) Table
(b) Forms
(c) Query
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Table

Question 12.
The data type suitable to the name of a person
Answer:
Text: [VARCHAR]

Question 13.
The default extension of LibreOffice Base file is
(a) .bmp
(b) .xls
(c) .lob
(d) .odb
Answer:
(d) .odb

Question 14.
Which among the format searches for all values ending with R?
(a) LIKE ‘*R*’
(b) LIKE ‘*R’
(c) LIKE ‘R*’
(d) LIKE ‘END\‘R’
Answer:
(b) LIKE ‘*R’

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 15.
ODBC stands for _______
Answer:
Open Database Connectivity

Question 16.
The data type suitable to the age of an employee is;
Answer:
Number (Numeric)

Question 17.
__________are used to store the data in the database
(a) Reports
(b) Forms
(c) Tables
(d) Queries
Answer:
(c) Tables

Question 18.
________ is a tool to connect tables in a database
(a) Forms
(b) Queries
(c) Relationships
(d) Fields
Answer:
(c) Relationships

Question 19.
Choose the right path to start up LibreOffice Base
(a) Applications → Office → LibreOffice Base
(b) Applications → Create → LibreOffice Base
(c) Applications → Login → Office → LibreOffice Base
(d) Applications → Create → Office → LibreOffice Base
Answer:
(a) Applications → Office → LibreOffice Base

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 20.
LibreOffice Base runs on _____ and _____ operating system
Answer:
Windows and Linux

Question 21.
Which among the following is not an advantage of LibreOffice Base
(a) The information is portable
(b) Ensure Data security
(c) Initial training is required for all users
(d) Many people can access the same database at the same time
Answer:
(c) Initial training is required for all users

Question 22.
Which among the following is not a component of Database system?
(a) Data
(b) Hardware
(c) Software
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 23.
RDBMs stands for ____________
Answer:
Relational Data Base Management System

Question 24.
The data type suitable to basic pay of employee:
Answer:
Number (Numeric)

Question 25.
What field type is used to store picture in a table?
Answer:
OLE object.

Question 26.
‘Join Line’ in the context of LibreOffice Base Tables means:
Answer:
Graphical representation of relationship between tables.

Question 27.
Reports are created from
(a) Tables
(b) Forms
(c) Relationships
(d) Tabs
Answer:
(a) Tables

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 28.
Database is referred to as _______________
(a) Front-end program
(b) Back – end program
(c) User-end program
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Back – end program

Question 29.
Which among the following is not a DBMS?
(a) Base
(b) Access
(C) Oracle
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 30.
Choose the right pairs.
(a) Desktop data base – Single user applications
(b) Desktop data base – Multi user applications
(c) Server data base – Multi user applications
(d) Server data base – Single user applications.
Answer:
(a) & (c)

Question 31.
_______ are the fundamental building blocks fo the database.
(a) Tables
(b) Forms
(c) Queries
(d) Reports
Answer:
(a) Tables

Question 32.
Each column of the table is called …..(a)…… and characteristics of which is called …….(b)…….
Answer:
(a) field
(b) attributes

Question 33.
The format for getting the employees whose names begins with ‘K’ is ______
Answer:
LIKE ‘K*’

Question 34.
To expect a well formatted printable data from LibreOffice Base database, we may use
Answer:
Report

Question 35.
__________ are used for connecting tables in database to get the advantage of data redundancy
(a) Relationships
(b) Primary key
(c) Forms
(d) Tables
Answer:
(a) Relationships

Question 36.
In a database context is a window or screen that contain numerous fields, or spaces to enter data
(a) Tables
(b) Forms
(c) Query
(d) Reports
Answer:
(b) Forms

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 37.
________ section contains the tittle of the report
(a) Field name
(b) Report header
(c) Form Header
(d) Report name
Answer:
(b) Report header

Question 38.
A ________ is a reference to a field in another relation or table
(a) Primary key
(b) Candidate key
(c) Foreign key
(d) Super key
Answer:
(c) Foreign key

Question 39.
The name which indicate the number of columns in the table
(a) Domain
(b) Tuple
(c) Degree
(d) Attribute
Answer:
(c) Degree

Question 40.
The end result of normalisation is known as ___________
Answer:
Refinement

Question 41.
Data type ‘Text’ can store up to characters
(a) 65,535
(b) 255
(c) 35,423
(d) 555
Answer:
(b) 255

Question 42.
Relationship between primary key of one table to primary key of another table is called
(a) One to one
(b) One to many
(c) Many to many
(d) Many to one
Answer:
(a) One to one

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 43.
A query criteria LIKE ‘RAJU*’ returns all names that: LIKE ‘RAJU*’
(a) Contains RAJU
(b) Starts with RAJU
(c) Ends with RAJU
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Starts with RAJU

Question 44.
The characteristics of an entity is ________________
Answer:
Attributes

Question 45.
The data type _______ can store upto 65, 535 characters
(a) Text
(b) Number
(c) Memo
(d) Date
Answer:
(c) Memo

Question 46.
Anything which has a real life existence is called ___________
Answer:
Entities

Question 47.
What criteria is used to get return a text starts with ‘A’
Answer:
LIKe ‘A*’

Question 48.
A text data field is used to hold ______ values
(a) Alpha numeric
(b) Numbers only
(c) Alphabets only
(d) Any data
Answer:
(a) Alpha numeric

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 49.
DBMS is an aggregate of data, hardware, software and ______
Answer:
Users

Question 50.
A _______ is a two dimensional array containing rows and columns
Answer:
Table

Plus Two Accountancy Data Base Management System for Accounting Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What do you mean by Data base?
Answer:
Database/ Data source – Introduction
A database is a collection of related data. It is organised in such a way that its contents can easily be accessed, managed and updated. In LibreOffice, database is also called data source.

Database consists of interrelated data tables that are structured in a manner that ensures-data consistency and integrity. LibreOffice base, MS Access, Oracle, SQL server, etc. Are the commonly used softwares for data base management.

Question 2.
Define Primary Key.
Answer:
Primary key is a unique key which identify a row in a table. A primary key comprises a single column or set of columns.

Question 3.
What are the different ‘views’ of a form?
Answer:
Form view, Layout view and Design view

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 4.
What are the components of Database system?
Answer:

  • Data
  • Hardware
  • Software
  • Users

Question 5.
What do you mean by Normalisation?
Answer:
Normalisation is the Alteration of tables that reduces data redundancy. Data redundancy means data duplication.

Question 6.
What are the different objects in LibreOffice Base?
Answer:
Tables, Relations, Forms, Queries and Reports.

Question 7.
Write the step for starting up Libre Office Base.
Answer:

  • Step 1 – Click on Applications
  • Step 2 – Select Office
  • Step 3 – Select LibreOffice Base

Path → Application → office → LibreOffice Base

Question 8.
What is an attribute?
Answer:
Attributes: These define the characteristics of an entity. Eg: Name, Age, Caste, Salary etc.

Question 9.
What do you mean by Query?
Answer:
Query:
Query is a question. Queries are used to view, change and analyse data in different ways. It creates a new table from the existing tables based upon the question/ request asked to the data base.

Question 10.
What is Join line?
Answer:
It is the graphical representation of relationship between tables.

Question 11.
What is relationships?
Answer:
These are links between tables.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 12.
How to run saved Query?
Answer:
Select Queries option from the left panel of the LibreOffice Base window. The saved query can be seen in the right side. Double click on the query name to run the query.

Question 13.
What are the different methods to create Forms in LibreOffice Base?
Answer:

  1. Create Form in Design view
  2. Use wizard to create Form

The second method is the easy way to create Forms in LibreOffice Base

Question 14.
How to close a Database file and Exit from it?
Answer:

  • Step 1 – Click on the File menu
  • Step 2 – Select Close

Then the file will be closed. To exit from the Base file, follow these steps:

  • Step 1 – Click on the File menu
  • Step 2 – Select exit LibreOffice

Question 15.
Give short note on Tables in LibreOffice Base
Answer:
A table is a database object used to store data about a particular subject. A table consists of records and fields, the columns are called fields the and rows are called records.

Question 16.
Write down the character length of the ‘Text’ data type and ‘memo’ data type.
Answer:

  • Text – 225 Characters
  • Memo – 65535 Characters

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 17.
List down the disadvantages of LibreOffice Base
Answer:
Disadvantages of database / Data source:

  1. Designing of database is a complex and time consuming process.
  2. Initial training is required for all the users.
  3. Installation cost is high.

Question 18.
Distinguish between database and database management system
Answer:
Database is a collection of data. It consists of inter-related data tables.
Database management system is a collection of programs that enables users to work on database. DBMS enables the user to create and maintain a database.

Question 19.
Match the following

  1. One to One Relationship – Non Primary Key to Non Primary Key
  2. One to Many Relationship – Primary key to Primary Key
  3. Many to Many Relationship – Non Primary key to Primary Key
  4. Many to One Relationship – Primary key to Non Primary Key

Answer:

  1. One to One Relationship – Primary key to Primary Key
  2. One to Many Relationship – Primary key to Non Primary Key
  3. Many to Many Relationship – Non Primary key to Non Primary Key
  4. Many to One Relationship – Non Primary key to Primary Key

Question 20.
What are the different methods for creating Queries?
Answer:

  • Using the Query Wizard
  • Using Design view

Plus Two Accountancy Data Base Management System for Accounting Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
List down the advantages of using Database.
Answer:
Advantage of database/ data source:

  1. All of the information is together
  2. The information is portable
  3. Information can be accessed at any time
  4. Many users can access the same database at the same time.
  5. Reduced data entry, storage and retrieval cost.

Question 2.
Explain the importance of Database Management System.
Answer:

  1. It helps to maintain records for ongoing use.
  2. It helps to generate reports based on the database.
  3. Mass volume of data can be managed easily.
  4. It is very useful; if the information stored in the system is subject to many changes.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 3.
Three options are available in database wizard to create a new database. What are they?
Answer:

  1. Create a new Database.
  2. Open an existing database.
  3. Connect to an existing database.

1.Create a new Database:
This option helps to create a new database with new tables, forms, queries, reports, etc.

2. Open an existing database:
This option helps to open an existing database file which had been created earlier.

3. Connect to an existing database:
This option helps to connect a database which is created on a server.

Question 4.
Distinguish between Desktop Database and Server Database.
Answer:

Desktop DatabaseServer Database
(a) It is single user database.(a) It is multi user database.
(b) It helps to do simple analysis and calculations.(b) It helps to do complex analysis and calculations.
(c) It is less expensive.(c) It is expensive.
(d) It is residing on personal computers.(d) It is residing on server computer.

Question 5.
List down the steps to create a Database in LibreOffice base
Answer:

  • Step 1 – Creation of Blank Database
  • Step 2 – Creation of Tables
  • Step 3 – Creation of Relationships
  • Step 4 – Creation of Forms
  • Step 5 – Creation of Queries
  • Step 6 – Creation of Reports

Question 6.
What are the different Data types commonly used in LibreOffice Base?
Answer:

  1. Text – Used to hold alphanumeric values
  2. Memo- Used to enter long pieces of text
  3. Number – Used to enter Numeric data
  4. Date – Used to enter data information
  5. Time – Used to enter time information

Question 7.
Some query criteria are given below. Write the query format.

  1. Search for all values which contain salary
  2. Search for all values beginning with K
  3. Search for all values ending with P
  4. Searches for all values beginning with Dr
  5. Searches for all values ending with Cr.

Answer:

  1. LIKE ‘*salary*’
  2. LIKE ‘K*’
  3. LIKE ‘*P’
  4. LIKE ‘Dr*’
  5. LIKE ‘*Cr’

Plus Two Accountancy Data Base Management System for Accounting Practical Lab Work Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Create a Table named ‘Tblstudents’ in LibreOffice Base with the following fields. Set the Admn No. as Primary Key
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 1
procedure:
Step 1 – Open Libre Office Base
Application → Office → LibreOffice Base.

Step 2 – Create a new database
Database wizard → Create a New Database → Next → Yes register the database for me → Open the database for editing Finish.

Step 3 – In Save Dialogue box, give the name STUDENTFEE and select a location to save the database and click Save button.
The new database file STUDENTFEE.odb. is created

Step 4 – Create Data Tables
From the left Database Pane, click on the icon Tables and below the Tasks section, click on ‘Create Table in Design view’
Database Pane → Tables → Create Table in Design view

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Step 5 – Field Name Entry
In Table creation Screen, Enter the Field names and select appropriate Data Types as given below.

Field NameData Type
Admn No.Number (Numeric)
Name of studentText (VARCHAR)
ClassText (VARCHAR)
Admission dateDate(DATE)
Fee PaidNumber (Numeric)

Step 6 – Setting Primary Key
To set the Admn No. as the Primary key, Right click on the row selector of Admn No. and select the Primary key from the drop down menu

Step 7 – Save Table
Click on Save button (or press Ctrl+S) to save the table. In save as dialogue box, Enter Tblstuderrts as table name and click on OK button Close the table creation screen

Step 8 – Data Entry
Database Pane → Tables → Created Tables → Select Tbl students → Double click to open it

Enter all the data given one by one

Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 2

Question 2.
Create Two Data Tables named TBLSTUDENT and TBLMARKS in LibreOffice Base with the following fields and show the relationship assuming that the first fields in both tables are set as primary keys

Table – 1
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 3
Table – 2
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 4
procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Base
Application → Office LibreOffice Base

Step 2 – Create new Database
Datebase wizard → Create a new database Next → Yes, register database for me → Open the data base for editing → click on Finish button

Step 3 – In save Dialogue box, give the name STUDENTFILE and select a location to save the database and click Save button.
The new database file STUDETFILE.odb is created

Step 4 – Create Data Tables
Create Table – 1
From the left Data base pane, click on the Icon Tables and below the Tasks section, click on ‘Create Table in Design view’,
Data base Pane → Tables → Create Table in Design view

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Step 5 – Field name Entry:
In Table creation screen, Enter the field names and select appropriate Data Types as given below

Field NameData Type
Admn No.Number (Numeric)
NameText (VARCHAR)
ClassText(VARCHAR)

Step 6 – Setting Primary key
To set Admn No as the primary key Right click → Primary key from the drop-down menu

Step 7 – Save Table
Press Ctrl+S on click on save button to save the table. Enter the name TBLSTUDENT → Click OK button.

Step 8 – Repeat the same steps for creating the second Table
Create Table -2

Field nameData Type
Class No.Number (Numeric)
MarkNumber (Numeric)

Set ‘Class No’ as the ‘Primary key’ save the table by naming TBLMARKS. Then close the table creation screen.

Step 9 – Data Entry
Data base Pane → Tables → Created Tables → Select → (Two tables TBLSTUDENT and TBLMARKS one by one) → Double click to open it
Enter all the details one by one.

Step 10 – Create Relationship
(a) Go to the Tools menu, select Relationships. Now Add Table dialogue box will appear. Add both the tables to the relationship window and close the Add Table dialogue box

(b) Create relationship between TBLSTUDENT and TBLMARK. Position the mouse pointer over the primary key of TBLSTUDENT table, hold down the left mouse button, drag the pointer right to the primary key in the TBLMARK table and then release the mouse button.

(c) Click on Save button in relation design window to save the relationship File → Save Click Close button to close the relation design window
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 5

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 3.
Create a Form in LibreOffice Base to Manage data in a table named customers with the following details.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 6
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice base
Application → Office LibreOffice Base

Step 2 – Create New Database
Database wizard → Create a new database Next → Yes, register database for me Open the database for edting → Click on Finish button

Step 3 – In save dialogue box, give the name CUSTOMERFILE . Select the location to save the database and cfick Save button.
The new database file CUSTOMERFILE.odb is created.

Step 4 – Create Data Tables
From the left database pane, click on the Icon Tables, and below the Tasks section, click on ‘Create Table in Design View’
Database Pane → Tables Create Tables in Design View

Step 5 – Enter necessary field names and select appropriate Data Type. Save the Table in the name TBLCUSTOMER and close the window

Step 6 – Create Form
From the left database pane, click on the Forms button and in right side, under Tasks section, click on Use Wizard to Create a Form.
Now Form wizard window opens
Data base Pane → Forms → Use wizard to create a Form

Step 7 – Selection of fields

  • In Form wizard, select TBLCUSTOMER from the combo box under the head Tables/Queries. → Click on Next button.
  • Add all Fields to Fields in the Form section in the right side by clicking >> button → Next button
  • Setup subform → Next → Arrange controls → Next
  • Set Data entry → Select The form is to display all data → Next → Apply styles → Next
  • Enter the name of the form inset Name Option as FORM CUSTOMER → select work with the Form → Finish

Now the data entry form will be opened

Step 8 – Data Entry in the form
Enter data in each field and Press Enter Key or Tab Key
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 7

Question 4.
Enter the following data in a database table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 8

  • Display the names of students who scored greater than or equal to 500.
  • Display the name of student whose name begin with ‘S’

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Base
Application → Office → LibreOffice Base

Step 2 – Create New Database
Datebase wizard → Create New Data base Next Yes, register the database form → Open the database for editing → Finish

Step 3 – In Save dialogue box, give the name STUDENTMARK and select the location to Save the data base and click Save button, the new data base file STUDENTMARK.odb. is created.

Step 4 – Create Data Table
From the left Database Pane, Click on the icon Tables, and below the Tasks section, Click on ‘Create Table in Design view’
Database Pane → Tables → Create Tables in Design view

Step 5 – Filed Name Entry
In Table creation Screen, Enter the Field names and select appropriate Data Types as given below

Step 6 – Setting Primary Key
To set STUDROLL_NO as primary key Right click → Select Primary key from the drop down menu

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Step 7 – Save Table
Click on Save button or Press Ctrl+S to save the table. In save as dialogue box, Enter TBLSTUDENTDETAILS as the name and dick on OK Button
Close the Table creation screen.

Step 8 – Data Entry
Data base pane → Tables → Created Tables → Select TBLSTUDENTDETAILS → Double click to open it Enter all the data on by one

Step 9 – Create Query

  • From the Data base Pane, Click on Queries button and in the right side under Task section, Click on Create Query in Design view. Now Add Table or Query Window opens.
  • Select the table TBLSTUDENTDETAILS and click Add button, then close the window.
  • In the Query Design window, double click on each Field in Table window to add all the fields to query design grid.

Step 10 – Enter Query Criteria (Question 1)
In Query design Grid, set the Criteria for the query.

  • Enter >=500, in the Criterion row in STUDMARK column.
  • Click on the RUN Query Button or Press F5 to display the result.
  • Save and close the query. File → Save. ‘Save as’ window opens. Give the name Query 1 and click on OK button.

Step 11 – Enter the Query Criteria (Question 2)
In the Query design grid, set the criteria for the query

a) Enter LIKE ‘S*’, in the criterion row in STUDNAME column.
b) Click on the Run Query Button or Press F5 to display the result.
c) Save and close the query.
File → Save. ‘Save as’ window opens. Give the name ‘Query 2’ and click on OK button.
Output – 1
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 9

Output – 2
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 10

Question 5.
Enter the following list of employees in Tblemployee and make a report from this table sorted in the order of Designation.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 11
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open Libre Office base

Step 2 – Create new database
Database wizard → Create a new database → Next → Yes, register database for me → Open the database for editing → Click on Finish Button.

Step 3 – In save dialogue box, give the name Employee file. Select the location to save the database and click Save button.
Now, the new database file Employeefile.odb is created.

Step 4 – Create data tables
From the left database pane, click on the icon Tables, and below the Tasks section, Click on Create Table in Design View. Database Pane → Tables → Create Tables in design view.

Step 5 – Enter the necessary field names and select appropriate Data Type. Save the Table in the name Tbl employee and close the window.

Step 6 – Create Report
In the left Pane of the data base window, click on the Reports button and in right side, Under Tasks section click on Use Wizard to create a Report. This will open a Report wizard.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Step 7 – In Field selection step, under Tables Queries, Select the table Tblemployee. Then Press Add All buttons [>>] to all fields to report. Then click Next button.

Step 8 – Labelling fields (Skip this Step) → Next → Grouping Level (Skip this Step) → Next → In sort Option, Select Designation against sort by, and click Next button.

Step 9 – Choose Layout section, Select Tabular in the layout. → Click Next → In create Report Section → Give the tittle of Report as Report-Designation and select modify I Report Layout → Click Finish button.

Step 10 – Report Design window, click on Page Header area → Insert → Report controls → Label field to insert a Header for the report

Step 11 – Double click on the Label Field inserted and in the property window edit the Label as “Designation List of Employees” and Press Enter.

Step 12 – Click on Execute Report button to view the Report.